You are on page 1of 272

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.

book Page i Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

PowerExchange Interfaces for


PowerCenter

Informatica PowerExchange
(Version 8.5.1)

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page ii Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Informatica PowerExchange Interfaces for PowerCenter


Copyright (c) 19982007 Informatica Corporation. All rights reserved.
This software and documentation contain proprietary information of Informatica Corporation and are provided under a license agreement containing
restrictions on use and disclosure and are also protected by copyright law. Reverse engineering of the software is prohibited. No part of this document may be
reproduced or transmitted in any form, by any means (electronic, photocopying, recording or otherwise) without prior consent of Informatica Corporation. This
Software is protected by U.S. and/or international Patents and other Patents Pending.
Use, duplication, or disclosure of the Software by the U.S. Government is subject to the restrictions set forth in the applicable software license agreement and as
provided in DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7702-3(a) (1995), DFARS 252.227-7013(c)(1)(ii) (OCT 1988), FAR 12.212(a) (1995), FAR 52.227-19, or FAR
52.227-14 (ALT III), as applicable.
The information in this product or documentation is subject to change without notice. If you find any problems in this product or documentation, please report
them to us in writing.
Informatica, PowerCenter, PowerCenterRT, PowerCenter Connect, PowerCenter Data Analyzer, PowerExchange, PowerMart, Metadata Manager, Informatica
Data Quality, Informatica Data Explorer, Informatica Complex Data Exchange and Informatica On Demand Data Replicator are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Informatica Corporation in the United States and in jurisdictions throughout the world. All other company and product names may be trade
names or trademarks of their respective owners.

DISCLAIMER: Informatica Corporation provides this documentation as is without warranty of any kind, either express or implied, including, but not limited
to, the implied warranties of non-infringement, merchantability, or use for a particular purpose. Informatica Corporation does not warrant that this software or
documentation is error free. The information provided in this software or documentation may include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. The
information in this software and documentation is subject to change at any time without notice.

Part Number: PWX-IPC-851-0001

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page iii Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Table of Contents
List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
List of Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Informatica Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Informatica Customer Portal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Informatica Web Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Informatica Knowledge Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Informatica Global Customer Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii

Part 1: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Chapter 1: Understanding PowerExchange Interfaces for PowerCenter3
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
PowerExchange Client for PowerCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Batch Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
CDC Batch and Continuous Extraction Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
CDC Real-time Extraction Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
PowerExchange ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Part 2: PowerExchange Client for PowerCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13


Chapter 2: Installing PWXPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Installing PowerExchange Client for PowerCenter (PWXPC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Installation Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Modifying the PowerExchange Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Adding PowerExchange Nodes on the PowerCenter Client Machine . . . . 18
Adding PowerExchange Nodes on the Integration Service Machine . . . . . 18
Adding PowerExchange Nodes in the dbmover.cfg File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Working with PowerExchange and PowerExchange Client for PowerCenter . . 20
Table of Contents

iii

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page iv Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Chapter 3: Working with Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Source and Target Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Working with Relational Source and Target Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Working with DB2 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Working with Microsoft SQL Server Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Working with Oracle Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Working with Sybase Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Editing Relational Source and Target Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Working with Non-Relational Source and Target Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Importing Non-Relational Source Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Importing Non-Relational Target Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Viewing Non-Relational Source and Target Definition Details . . . . . . . . 51
Editing Non-Relational Source and Target Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Working with Extraction Map Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Viewing Extraction Map Definition Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Editing a Extraction Map Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Previewing PowerExchange Data in Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Previewing PowerExchange Relational Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Previewing PowerExchange Non-Relational Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Previewing PowerExchange Changed Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
PowerExchange Group Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Using Group Source with Non-Relational Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Using Group Source with CDC Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Working with Source Qualifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Transformation Datatypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Creating Source Qualifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Editing Source Qualifier Transformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Using Lookup Transformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Usage Considerations for PowerExchange Sources and Targets . . . . . . . . . 76
Configuring Lookups for IMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Configuring Lookups for CDC Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Chapter 4: Configuring Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Connection Types for Extracting Source Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Connection Types for Loading Target Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

iv

Table of Contents

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page v Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Configuring Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
DB2 Batch Mode Relational Database Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
DB2 CDC Mode Application Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
NRDB Batch Mode Application Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
NRDB CDC Mode Application Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
NRDB Lookup Relational Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
MSSQL Batch Mode Relational Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
MSSQL CDC Mode Application Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Oracle Batch Mode Relational Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Oracle CDC Mode Application Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Sybase Batch Mode Relational Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Configuring Connection Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Common Connection Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Batch Application and Relational Connection Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . 110
CDC-Specific Connection Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Understanding Commit Processing with PWXPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Chapter 5: Working with Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Pipeline Partitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Real-time Session Rules and Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Extracting Data in Batch Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Extracting Data from Multiple Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Constraint-Based Loading for Relational Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Session Properties for Non-Relational Batch Mode Sessions . . . . . . . . . 129
Session Properties for Relational Batch Mode Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Extracting CDC Data in Change and Real-time Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
PowerExchange Extraction Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Extracting CDC Data from Multiple Sources in a Session . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Constraint-Based Loading for Relational Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Session Properties for Change and Real-Time Mode Sessions . . . . . . . . 137
Loading Data to PowerExchange Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Loading Data to Relational Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Loading Data to Non-Relational Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Chapter 6: Restart and Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Table of Contents

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page vi Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Understanding PWXPC Restart and Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151


Session Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Recovery Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Recovery State Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Recovery State File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
The Restart Token File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Determining the Restart Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Initializing and Running CDC Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Ending CDC Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Creating Recovery Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Recovery Table Creation with PowerExchange Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Creating the Recovery Tables Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Configuring the Restart Token File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Syntax Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Statement Syntax Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Restart Token File Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Restart Token File Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
PWXPC Restart and Recovery Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Enabling Session Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Configuring CDC Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Application Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Using DTLUAPPL with CDC Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Starting CDC Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Stopping CDC Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Changing CDC Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Recovering from CDC Session Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Managing Session Log and Restart Token File History . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Chapter 7: Flexible Key Custom Transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177


Target Key Transformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Configuring the PowerExchange Extraction Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Configuring PowerCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Group Source and Flexible Transformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Part 3: PowerExchange ODBC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

vi

Table of Contents

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page vii Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Chapter 8: Installing PowerExchange ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Creating ODBC Data Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Creating ODBC Data Sources on the PowerCenter Client Machine . . . 195
Creating ODBC Data Sources on the Integration Service Machine . . . . 195

Chapter 9: Working with Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Working with Source and Target Definitions for PowerExchange Batch . . . . 199
Importing a Source or Target Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Working with Source Definitions for PowerExchange Change or Real-time . 202
Importing a Change Data Capture Source Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Chapter 10: Configuring Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Working with Connections for PowerExchange ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Connection Types for Extracting Source Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Connection Types for Loading Target Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Configuring Attributes for Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Chapter 11: Working with Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211


Working with WorkflowsOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Pipeline Partitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Extracting Data from PowerExchange in Batch Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Session Properties for Non-Relational Batch Mode Sessions . . . . . . . . . 213
Session Properties for Relational Batch Mode Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Extracting Data from PowerExchange in Change and Real-time Mode . . . . . 217
Session Properties for Change and Real-time Mode Sessions . . . . . . . . . 217
Loading Data to PowerExchange Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 12: PowerExchange Restart and Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Restart and Recovery Using PowerExchange ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Managing Restart Tokens Using PowerExchange ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Table of Contents

vii

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page viii Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Part 4: Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225


Appendix A: Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Organizing Sources by Map Type in Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Filtering Source Data Using PWXPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Using DTLREXE to Submit MVS Batch Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Creating Sequential and GDG Data Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Appendix B: Datatypes and Code Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239


Datatype ReferenceOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
PowerExchange and Transformation Datatypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Relational Datatypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Reading and Writing Binary Data in PowerExchange Client for PowerCenter 244
Using Code Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Appendix C: Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247


Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

viii

Table of Contents

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page ix Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

List of Figures
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure

1-1. PWXPC Batch Extraction Mode Data Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


1-2. PWXPC Change Mode Extraction Data Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3. PWXPC Real-time Mode Extraction Data Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1. Import from PowerExchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2. Import from PowerExchange - Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3. Import from PowerExchange - DB2/390 Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4. Import from PowerExchange - DB2/400 or DB2/UDB Source . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5. Import from PowerExchange - DB2390 Select Datamaps List . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6. Import from PowerExchange - Microsoft SQL Server Source . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7. Import from PowerExchange - MSSQL Select Datamaps List . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8. Import from PowerExchange - Oracle Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9. Import from PowerExchange - Oracle Select Datamaps List . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-10. Import from PowerExchange - Sybase Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-11. Import from PowerExchange - Sybase Select Datamaps List . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-12. Non-Relational Source Definition with Multiple Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-13. Import from PowerExchange - Non-Relational Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-14. Import from PowerExchange - Single Record Source Data Maps . . . . . . . . .
3-15. Import from PowerExchange - Multiple Record Source Data Maps . . . . . . .
3-16. Import from PowerExchange - Non-Relational Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-17. Import from PowerExchange - Non-Relational Target Select Datamaps List
3-18. Non-Relational Table - Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-19. Non-Relational Table - Metadata Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-20. Import from PowerExchange - CDC Datamaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-21. Import from PowerExchange - CDC Select Datamaps List . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-22. Extraction Map Table - Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-23. Extraction Map Table - Metadata Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-24. Multi-record Non-Relational Source Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-25. Group Source Mapping Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1. Relational Connection Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2. Application Connection Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3. Application Connection Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1. Session Mapping Tab - Batch VSAM Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2. Session Mapping Tab - DB2 Readers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3. Session Properties Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4. Session Mapping Tab - Extraction Map Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5. Session Mapping Tab - Relational Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6. Session Mapping Tab - Relational Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7. Session Mapping Tab - Non-Relational Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1. Application Connection - Number of Restart Token Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1. Primary key updates from a source relational table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.. 7
.. 8
.. 9
. 23
. 24
. 26
. 27
. 29
. 31
. 33
. 35
. 37
. 39
. 41
. 43
. 45
. 47
. 48
. 49
. 51
. 52
. 53
. 58
. 59
. 60
. 61
. 72
. 73
. 83
. 84
. 85
130
133
137
138
140
143
145
175
178

List of Figures

ix

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page x Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure

7-2. DB2 Extraction Map Source Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . .


7-3. DB2 Target Table Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4. DB2 Source to DB2 Target CDC mapping . . . . . . . . .
10-1. ODBC - Connection Object Definition . . . . . . . . . .
A-1. Filter Overrides: Single-Record Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-2. Filter Overrides: Multi-Record Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-3. Pre-Session Command - DTLREXE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-4. Workflow Link Condition - DTLREXE . . . . . . . . . . .
A-5. Command Task Expression Editor - DTLREXE . . . . .
A-6. Session Mapping Tab - File Create Pre-SQL Command

List of Figures

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.183
.183
.184
.208
.231
.232
.234
.235
.235
.237

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page xi Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

List of Tables
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table

1-1. Functional Comparison between PWXPC and PowerExchange ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . 4


1-2. PowerExchange Client for PowerCenter Extract and Load Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1-3. Group Source Usage by PowerExchange Database Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1-4. PowerExchange ODBC Extract and Load Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2-1. Valid Version Combinations for PowerExchange and PWXPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3-1. Attributes of Fields in a Non-Relational Source Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
3-2. Non-Relational Source Definition Metadata Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3-3. Attributes of Fields in a Extraction Map Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
3-4. Extraction Map Definition Metadata Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
4-1. Connection Types for Extracting Source Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
4-2. Connection Types for Loading Target Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
4-3. PWX DB2390, DB2400, and DB2UDB Relational Database Connection Attributes 86
4-4. DB2390, DB2400, and DB2UDB CDC Mode Application Connection Attributes . 89
4-5. NRDB Batch Mode Application Connection Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
4-6. NRDB CDC Mode Application Connection Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
4-7. NRDB Lookup Relational Connection Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
4-8. MSSQL Batch Mode Relational Connection Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
4-9. MSSQL CDC Mode Application Connection Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
4-10. Oracle Batch Mode Relational Connection Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
4-11. Oracle CDC Mode Application Connection Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
4-12. Sybase Batch Mode Relational Connection Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
4-13. Encryption and Compression Connection Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
4-14. Pacing Size Connection Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
4-15. Convert Character Data Connection Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
4-16. Write Mode Connection Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
4-17. Retrieve PWX Log Entries Connection Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
4-18. Image Type Connection Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
4-19. Event Table Connection Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
4-20. CAPI Connection Override Connection Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
4-21. Idle Time Connection Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
4-22. Change and Real-time Mode Restart Connection Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
4-23. UOW Count Connection Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
4-24. Real-Time Flush Latency Connection Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
4-25. Commit Threshold Connection Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
5-1. Session Properties for Non-Relational Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
6-1. Default Starting Extraction Points for Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
6-2. Recovery Table SQL Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
6-3. CDC Sessions - Recommended Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
10-1. Connection Types for Extracting Source Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
10-2. Target Database Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

List of Tables

xi

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page xii Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Table 10-3. ODBC Connection Object Definition Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209


Table 11-1. Partition Types for Partitioning Points for Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Table B-1. PowerExchange and Transformation Datatypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241

xii

List of Tables

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page xi Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Preface

PowerExchange Interfaces for PowerCenter describes the Informatica interface between


PowerExchange and PowerCenter. It is written for developers and administrators who are
responsible for creating, running, and administering workflows and sessions that interface
with PowerExchange.
This manual assumes that you have knowledge of your operating systems, relational database
concepts, and the database engines and non-relational files in your environment. This manual
also assumes that you are familiar with the basic operation of PowerExchange and
PowerCenter
This manual discusses:

The PowerExchange Client for PowerCenter (PWXPC) interface

The Power Exchange ODBC interface with PowerCenter

xi

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page xii Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Informatica Resources
Informatica Customer Portal
As an Informatica customer, you can access the Informatica Customer Portal site at
http://my.informatica.com. The site contains product information, user group information,
newsletters, access to the Informatica customer support case management system (ATLAS),
the Informatica Knowledge Base, Informatica Documentation Center, and access to the
Informatica user community.

Informatica Web Site


You can access the Informatica corporate web site at http://www.informatica.com. The site
contains information about Informatica, its background, upcoming events, and sales offices.
You will also find product and partner information. The services area of the site includes
important information about technical support, training and education, and implementation
services.

Informatica Knowledge Base


As an Informatica customer, you can access the Informatica Knowledge Base at
http://my.informatica.com. Use the Knowledge Base to search for documented solutions to
known technical issues about Informatica products. You can also find answers to frequently
asked questions, technical white papers, and technical tips.

Informatica Global Customer Support


There are many ways to access Informatica Global Customer Support. You can contact a
Customer Support Center through telephone, email, or the WebSupport Service.
Use the following email addresses to contact Informatica Global Customer Support:

support@informatica.com for technical inquiries

support_admin@informatica.com for general customer service requests

WebSupport requires a user name and password. You can request a user name and password at
http://my.informatica.com.

xii

Preface

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page xiii Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Use the following telephone numbers to contact Informatica Global Customer Support:
North America / South America

Europe / Middle East / Africa

Asia / Australia

Informatica Corporation
Headquarters
100 Cardinal Way
Redwood City, California
94063
United States

Informatica Software Ltd.


6 Waltham Park
Waltham Road, White Waltham
Maidenhead, Berkshire
SL6 3TN
United Kingdom

Informatica Business Solutions


Pvt. Ltd.
Diamond District
Tower B, 3rd Floor
150 Airport Road
Bangalore 560 008
India

Toll Free
+1 877 463 2435

Toll Free
00 800 4632 4357

Toll Free
Australia: 1 800 151 830
Singapore: 001 800 4632 4357

Standard Rate
United States: +1 650 385 5800

Standard Rate
Belgium: +32 15 281 702
France: +33 1 41 38 92 26
Germany: +49 1805 702 702
Netherlands: +31 306 022 797
United Kingdom: +44 1628 511 445

Standard Rate
India: +91 80 4112 5738

Preface

xiii

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page xiv Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

xiv

Preface

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 1 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Part 1: Introduction

This part contains the following chapter:

Understanding PowerExchange Interfaces for PowerCenter, 3

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 2 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Part 1: Introduction

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 3 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Chapter 1

Understanding PowerExchange
Interfaces for PowerCenter
This chapter includes the following topics:

Overview, 4

PowerExchange Client for PowerCenter, 5

PowerExchange ODBC, 10

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 4 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Overview
You can use the following interfaces to extract and load data through PowerExchange when
using PowerCenter:

PowerExchange Client for PowerCenter (PWXPC). Chapters 2 to 6 describe


PowerExchange Client for PowerCenter. You can use it to extract and load data through
PowerExchange for a variety of data types on a variety of platforms. PowerExchange Client
for PowerCenter is fully integrated into PowerCenter.

PowerExchange ODBC. Chapters 8 to 12 describe the PowerExchange ODBC interface.


You can use PowerExchange ODBC connections with PowerCenter to extract and load
data through PowerExchange for a variety of data types on a variety of platforms.

Note: When connecting to PowerExchange, Informatica recommends using PWXPC instead

of PowerExchange ODBC. PWXPC has additional functionality as well as improved


performance and superior CDC recovery and restart.
Table 1-1 compares the interface functionality of the PowerExchange Client for PowerCenter
and PowerExchange ODBC:
Table 1-1. Functional Comparison between PWXPC and PowerExchange ODBC
PWXPC

ODBC

Function

Description

Yes

Yes

Extract data in batch and CDC


mode.

PowerExchange extracts relational and non-relational data


in batch mode and changed data in CDC mode.

Yes

No

Extract data using Group


Source

PowerExchange Group Source processes change data for


multiple sources or multiple record types in a VSAM and
sequential files in a single pass.

Yes

No

Save target data and CDC


restart information in a single
commit.

CDC restart information is stored in the same database as


the relational target table. The restart information is
updated in the same commit as the target data providing
guaranteed restart and recovery for CDC data.

Yes

No

Use PowerCenter graceful stop


for real-time sessions.

PowerCenter stops real-time sessions after all data in the


pipeline is written to the targets.

Yes

No

Use the change indicator to


determine the type of change
record.

Each changed data record indicates whether it is an insert,


update, or delete. When the change indicator is used, an
Update Strategy transformation is not required to process
inserts, updates, and deletes.

Yes

No

Create source definitions from


PowerExchange extraction
maps.

Extraction maps contain the PowerExchange autogenerated columns minimizing modification of the source
definition in Designer.

Yes

No

Modify the file name in the


PowerCenter source definition.

PowerCenter source definition can specify the file name


and override the file name specified in the PowerExchange
data map.

For an overview of PowerExchange, see the PowerExchange Getting Started Guide.


For an overview of PowerCenter, see the PowerCenter Getting Started Guide.
4

Chapter 1: Understanding PowerExchange Interfaces for PowerCenter

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 5 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

PowerExchange Client for PowerCenter


PowerExchange Client for PowerCenter is installed with PowerCenter and integrates
PowerExchange and PowerCenter to extract relational, non-relational, and changed data.
PWXPC also loads relational and non-relational data in batch mode.
Use the following modes to extract relational and non-relational data:

Batch

Change Data Capture (CDC) Real-time

Change Data Capture (CDC) batch extraction mode from condense files

Change Data Capture (CDC) continuous extraction mode from condense files

Table 1-2 lists the database types that PowerExchange Client for PowerCenter can access to
extract data or load data:
Table 1-2. PowerExchange Client for PowerCenter Extract and Load Capabilities
Database Type

Batch Mode
Extract/Load

CDC Real Time


Extraction Mode

CDC Batch
Extraction Mode

CDC Continuous
Extraction Mode

Adabas

Yes/Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Datacom

Yes/No

Yes

No

Yes

DB2 for z/OS

Yes/Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

DB2 for i5/OS

Yes/Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

DB2 for Linux, UNIX,


and Windows

Yes/Yes

Yes

Yes

No

IDMS

Yes/No

Yes

No

Yes

IMS

Yes/Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

MSSQL

Yes/Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Oracle

Yes/Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Sequential files

Yes/Yes

No

Yes

No

Sybase

Yes/Yes

No

Yes

No

VSAM

Yes/Yes*

Yes

Yes*

Yes

* With ESDS and RRDS VSAM datasets, only inserts are allowed. Inserts, updates, and deletes are allowed for KSDS VSAM data
sets.

PowerExchange group source reads all data from the same physical source in a single pass.
PWXPC uses PowerExchange group source to extract changed data from the change stream.
PWXPC also uses group source to extract data from VSAM data sets and sequential files
containing multiple record types. As a result, PWXPC connections process data faster than
PowerExchange ODBC connections and reduce PowerExchange resource consumption on
the source or extraction platform. For more information about group source, see
PowerExchange Group Source on page 71.
PowerExchange Client for PowerCenter

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 6 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Table 1-3 lists the PowerExchange database types that read sources in a single pass during
extraction:
Table 1-3. Group Source Usage by PowerExchange Database Type
Database Type

Batch Extraction
Mode

CDC Real Time


Extraction Mode

CDC Batch
Extraction Mode

CDC Continuous
Extraction Mode

Adabas

No

Yes

Yes

No

Datacom

No

Yes

Yes

No

DB2 for z/OS

No

Yes

Yes

No

DB2 for i5/OS

No

Yes

Yes

No

DB2 for Linux, UNIX,


and Windows

No

Yes

No

No

IDMS

No

Yes

Yes

No

IMS

No

Yes

Yes

No

MSSQL

No

Yes

No

No

Oracle

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Sequential files

Yes

No

No

No

Sybase

No

No

No

No

VSAM

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Batch Mode
Use PWX batch application and relational connections to extract and load data for relational
databases and non-relational data sets and files through PowerExchange. PWXPC connects to
PowerExchange using the PowerExchange Call Level Interface (SCLI).
You can extract all records in multiple record types from VSAM and sequential files with a
single pass of the data using PWXPC. In contrast, ODBC connections read a single record
type at a time requiring multiple passes of the data.

Chapter 1: Understanding PowerExchange Interfaces for PowerCenter

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 7 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

The following diagram shows the data flow of source data from PowerExchange through
PWXPC and PowerCenter to the target tables:
Figure 1-1. PWXPC Batch Extraction Mode Data Flow

CDC Batch and Continuous Extraction Modes


PowerExchange Condense captures changes for relational tables and non-relational data sets
and files from the change stream and writes the changed data to condense files. The change
stream contains the source data changes in time sequence order. As a result, the changes in a
single unit of work are not contiguous in the change stream. The UOW Cleanser reconstructs
the units of work into complete and consecutive units of work based on transaction end time.
PowerExchange Condense writes the reconstructed units of work to condense files after which
you can use extract the changed data.
PWXPC extracts changed data from PowerExchange condense files in two different modes:

Batch extraction mode from condense files. Use PWX CDC Change connections to
extract changed data from condense files in batch extraction mode. PWXPC uses the
PowerExchange CAPX access method when processing data with CDC Change
connections. PowerExchange stops the extraction after the data from all condense files is
read.

Continuous extraction mode from condense files. Use PWX CDC Real Time
connections for Oracle sources to extract changed data from condense files in continuous
extraction mode. PWXPC uses the PowerExchange CAPXRT access method when

PowerExchange Client for PowerCenter

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 8 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

processing data with CDC Real Time connections. PowerExchange runs the extraction
until stopped. See the PowerExchange Oracle Adapter Guide for more information.
PWXPC connects to PowerExchange using the PowerExchange Call Level Interface (SCLI).
PowerExchange reads the changed data from each condense file once for all sources in the
mapping in a single pass.
The following diagram shows the data flow of condensed changed data from PowerExchange
through PWXPC and PowerCenter to the target tables:
Figure 1-2. PWXPC Change Mode Extraction Data Flow

CDC Real-time Extraction Mode


You can extract changed data for relational tables and non-relational data sets and files
directly from the change stream in real-time. The change stream contains the source data
changes in time sequence order. As a result, the changes in a single unit of work are not
contiguous in the change stream. The UOW Cleanser reconstructs the units of work into
complete and consecutive units of work based on transaction end time. The UOW Cleanser is
incorporated into UDB and SQL Server CDC but is a separate task for all other
PowerExchange CDC sources.
Use PWX CDC Real Time application connections to extract changed data for relational
tables or non-relational data sets and files directly from the change stream. PWXPC connects
to PowerExchange using the PowerExchange Call Level Interface (SCLI) and specifying the
PowerExchange CAPXRT access method. PowerExchange reads the changed data from the

Chapter 1: Understanding PowerExchange Interfaces for PowerCenter

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 9 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

change stream for all sources in the mapping in a single pass. PWXPC real-time sessions run
for a specified period or continuously until stopped.
The following diagram shows the data flow of changed data from PowerExchange through
PWXPC and PowerCenter to the target tables:
Figure 1-3. PWXPC Real-time Mode Extraction Data Flow

PowerExchange Client for PowerCenter

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 10 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

PowerExchange ODBC
PowerExchange provides a thin ODBC driver that you can use with PowerCenter. The
Integration Service uses PowerExchange ODBC to connect to PowerExchange either locally
or remotely. Using PowerExchange ODBC, you can extract and load relational and nonrelational data. You can also extract changed data.
Use the following modes to extract relational and non-relational data:

Batch. PowerExchange ODBC extracts and loads data from a relational table or nonrelational file through PowerExchange. You can read multiple record VSAM data sets and
sequential files using the ODBC interface with multiple passes of the data to read all
record types.

Change Data Capture (CDC) batch extraction mode from condense files.
PowerExchange ODBC extracts changed data from condense files through
PowerExchange reading all of the changes captured in condense files since the last
extraction session. PowerExchange ODBC reads the changed data once for each source in
the mapping resulting in multiple passes of the condense files. The extraction session ends
when all captured changes are read. PowerExchange maintains restart information in the
CDEP file on the source machine. PowerExchange ODBC has limited restart capability.

Change Data Capture (CDC) Real-time. PowerExchange ODBC extracts changed data in
real time from the change stream using one pass of the data for each source in the
mapping. You can run real-time extractions for a specified time period or continuously
until stopped. PowerExchange maintains restart information in the CDEP file on the
source machine. PowerExchange ODBC has limited restart capability.

Table 1-4 shows the PowerExchange ODBC extract and load capabilities:
Table 1-4. PowerExchange ODBC Extract and Load Capabilities

10

Database Type

Batch Mode
Extract

Batch Mode Load

CDC Batch
Extraction Mode

CDC Real-time
Extraction Mode

Adabas

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Datacom

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

DB2 for z/OS

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

DB2 for i5/OS

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and


Windows

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

IDMS

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

IMS

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

MSSQL

No

Yes

No

Yes

Oracle

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Sequential/flat files

Yes

Yes

No

No

Chapter 1: Understanding PowerExchange Interfaces for PowerCenter

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 11 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Table 1-4. PowerExchange ODBC Extract and Load Capabilities


Database Type

Batch Mode
Extract

Batch Mode Load

CDC Batch
Extraction Mode

CDC Real-time
Extraction Mode

VSAM

Yes

Yes*

Yes

Yes

* With ESDS and RRDS VSAM datasets, only inserts are allowed. Inserts, updates, and deletes are allowed for KSDS VSAM data
sets.

PowerExchange ODBC

11

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 12 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

12

Chapter 1: Understanding PowerExchange Interfaces for PowerCenter

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 13 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Part 2: PowerExchange Client


for PowerCenter
This part contains the following chapters:

Installing PWXPC, 15

Working with Mappings, 21

Configuring Connections, 79

Working with Sessions, 127

Restart and Recovery, 149

Flexible Key Custom Transformation, 177

13

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 14 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

14

Part 2: PowerExchange Client for PowerCenter

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 15 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Chapter 2

Installing PWXPC

This chapter includes the following topics:

Overview, 16

Installing PowerExchange Client for PowerCenter (PWXPC), 17

Modifying the PowerExchange Configuration Files, 18

Working with PowerExchange and PowerExchange Client for PowerCenter, 20

15

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 16 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Overview
This chapter describes how to install and configure PowerExchange Client for PowerCenter
(PWXPC).

Before You Begin


PowerExchange Client for PowerCenter (PWXPC) is a native PowerCenter plug-in that is
installed with PowerCenter.
To use PWXPC, you must install the following products:

PowerCenter 8.5.1. This includes the PWXPC plug-in. For more information about
installing PowerCenter, see the PowerCenter Installation Guide.

PowerExchange 8.5.1. Install PowerExchange on the PowerCenter Client and Integration


Service machines. For more information about installing PowerExchange see the
PowerExchange Installation Guide.

If you install the PowerCenter Integration Service on a 32-bit machine, install the 32-bit
version of PowerExchange on the same machine. If you install the Integration Service on a
64-bit machine, install the 64-bit version of PowerExchange on the same machine.
PowerExchange Navigator is a 32-bit application. You can use a 32-bit PowerCenter Client
and PowerExchange Navigator to communicate with a 64-bit version of either product.
Note: If the appropriate version of PowerExchange is not installed and available on the

PowerCenter Client platform, the Import from PowerExchange dialog box will not function.

16

Chapter 2: Installing PWXPC

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 17 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Installing PowerExchange Client for PowerCenter


(PWXPC)
To use PWXPC, PowerExchange must be installed on the node where the PowerCenter
Integration Service executes as well as on PowerCenter Client platforms.

Installation Steps
The PowerExchange Client for PowerCenter (PWXPC) is installed when you install
PowerCenter on the client and Integration Service machines.
You must still configure PowerExchange configuration files on the Integration Service node.
To configure PowerExchange Client for PowerCenter for use on the PowerCenter Integration
Service and Client, you must add NODE statements in the PowerExchange dbmover.cfg file
on the PowerCenter Client and Integration Service machines for those PowerExchange
Listeners to which you wish to connect. See Modifying the PowerExchange Configuration
Files on page 18.
Read the Release Notes and PowerExchange Migration Guide for any changes to installation or
connectivity.

Upgrading
When upgrading from a previous release of PowerCenter, you must perform a repository
upgrade. This process registers the PWXPC plug-in. No repository upgrade is necessary if
upgrading from 8.5 to 8.5.1.
When upgrading from PowerCenter 8.1.1 SP2 (or any higher 8.1.1 Service Pack) and using
enhanced restart for CDC sessions, do the following:
Upgrading for PWXPC enhanced restart users:
1.

Prior to migrating to PowerCenter 8.5.x, cleanly shutdown all CDC sessions and run
recovery on all CDC sessions. PWXPC creates a backup restart token file with a
timestamp appended. Save this file.

2.

As a precaution, backup the relational tables which are targets in the CDC sessions. Also
backup the PowerCenter recovery tables.

3.

After completing the migration to PowerCenter 8.5.x, copy the backup restart token files
PWXPC created to the appropriate restart token file for each CDC session. This ensures
that the restart token files contain the restart points from the point of interruption on the
previous release.

4.

Cold start the session so PWXPC uses only the newly populated restart token file to
restart the CDC session.

Installing PowerExchange Client for PowerCenter (PWXPC)

17

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 18 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Modifying the PowerExchange Configuration Files


You must define nodes for the PowerExchange Listeners in the PowerExchange configuration
file (dbmover.cfg) on the Integration Service and Client machines. The NODE statements
specify the communication information that PowerExchange uses to communicate with
Listeners that access the source or target databases or files.
Note: You can also use PowerExchange local mode if the data resides on the same machine as

the Integration Service. In local mode, a PowerExchange Listener is not required. If local
mode is used, there is no need to update to the PowerExchange dbmover.cfg file. Specify
local in the Location attribute in PWXPC connections.

Adding PowerExchange Nodes on the PowerCenter Client Machine


PWXPC connects to a PowerExchange Listener to import source and target definitions.
PWXPC retrieves the metadata from the machine indicated in the NODE statement, or
locally if using local mode.
Update the dbmover.cfg file on the PowerCenter Client machine to provide the appropriate
NODE statements for the PowerExchange Listeners to which you need to connect. See
Configuration File Parameters in the PowerExchange Reference Manual for information
about how to specify the NODE statement in the dbmover.cfg file.
The nodes you add to the dbmover.cfg file are specified in the Location field in Import from
PowerExchange dialog box.

Adding PowerExchange Nodes on the Integration Service Machine


PWXPC connects to the appropriate PowerExchange Listener to extract data from a source or
load data to a target.
Update the dbmover.cfg file on the Integration Service machine to provide the appropriate
NODE= statements for the PowerExchange Listeners to which you need to connect. For
information about how to specify the NODE statement in dbmover.cfg, see the
Configuration File Parameters chapter in PowerExchange Reference Manual.
The nodes you add to the dbmover.cfg file on the Integration Service machine are specified in
the Location value of the PWXPC connections.

Adding PowerExchange Nodes in the dbmover.cfg File


Use the following procedure to add PowerExchange nodes in the dbmover.cfg file.
To add PowerExchange nodes in the dbmover.cfg file:

18

1.

Locate the dbmover.cfg file in the PowerExchange root directory.

2.

Open the file with a text editor.

Chapter 2: Installing PWXPC

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 19 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

3.

Create a node for each PowerExchange Listener you want to register using the following
guidelines:
NODE=(<node name>,TCPIP,<hostname>,<port_number>)

where <node name> is a logical name used to reference the PowerExchange Listener and
<hostname> and <port_number> are the host name (or IP address) and port number of
the PowerExchange Listener.
4.

Save your changes.

The following example shows several nodes in a dbmover.cfg file:


/********************************************************************/
/* PowerExchange Configuration File
/********************************************************************/
NODE=(AS400_DB2,TCPIP,AS400_1,2480)
NODE=(MVS1_VSAM,TCPIP,MVS1,5539)
NODE=(MVS2_DB2,TCPIP,10.3.4.5,5538)

For more information, see Configuration File Parameters in the PowerExchange Reference
Manual.

Modifying the PowerExchange Configuration Files

19

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 20 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Working with PowerExchange and PowerExchange


Client for PowerCenter
You can use different versions of PowerExchange with PWXPC provided the PowerExchange
version and release are equal to or higher than that of PowerCenter. In this environment,
exploitation of new functionality is limited but existing functionality continues to operate.
Table 2-1 indicates the combinations of PowerCenter and PWXPC that you can use with
PowerExchange for migration purposes:
Table 2-1. Valid Version Combinations for PowerExchange and PWXPC

PowerExchange

PowerCenter / PowerExchange Client for PowerCenter


7.1.0

7.1.1

7.1.2

7.1.3

7.1.4

7.1.5

8.0.0

8.1.0

8.1.1

8.5.0

8.5.1

5.2.0

No

Yes1

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

5.2.1

No

Yes

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

5.2.2

No

Yes

Yes 2

Yes3

Yes 3

Yes3

No

No

No

No

No

8.0.0

No

No

No

Yes4

Yes 4

Yes4

Yes

No

No

No

No

8.1.0

No

No

No

Yes4

Yes 4

Yes4

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

8.1.1

No

No

No

Yes4

Yes 4

Yes4

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

8.5.0

No

No

No

Yes4

Yes 4

Yes4

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

8.5.1

No

No

No

Yes4

Yes 4

Yes4

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

1. Support for PWXPC V7.1.1 was introduced with PowerExchange V5.2.0 Patch 02
2. Support for PWXPC V7.1.2 was introduced with PowerExchange V5.2.2 Patch 01
3. Support for PWXPC V7.1.3 was introduced with PowerExchange V5.2.2 Patch 02 is the minimum level required for V71.4 and V7.1.5.
4. See Using Versions of PowerCenter Earlier than v8.x with PowerExchange v8.x in PowerExchange Migration Guide.

20

Chapter 2: Installing PWXPC

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 21 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Chapter 3

Working with Mappings

This chapter includes the following topics:

Overview, 22

Source and Target Definitions, 23

Working with Relational Source and Target Definitions, 25

Working with Non-Relational Source and Target Definitions, 43

Working with Extraction Map Definitions, 57

Previewing PowerExchange Data in Designer, 63

PowerExchange Group Source, 71

Working with Source Qualifiers, 75

Using Lookup Transformations, 76

21

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 22 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Overview
A mapping is a set of source and target definitions linked by transformation objects that
define the rules for data transformation. Mappings represent the data flow between sources
and targets.
Source and target definitions represent metadata for sources and targets. When you create a
source definition, its structure differs depending on the type of source it represents. Nonrelational sources require a multi-group source definition. Relational sources use a singlegroup source definition. The source qualifier for a source definition also differs in structure
depending on type of source definition.
After you create a source or target definition, you can include it in a mapping to extract data
from the source or load data to the target. You can extract source data in batch, change, or
real-time mode. For a list of sources and targets that PowerExchange Client for PowerCenter
supports, see Table 1-2 on page 5. This table also lists whether the Integration Service can
read the source data in batch, change, or real-time mode.
With CDC mappings, it is generally necessary to have multiple mappings: a batch mapping to
materialize the target tables from the source tables in preparation for CDC and the CDC
mapping itself which then uses extraction map sources for the source tables. To minimize the
effort in creating these mappings, create any business rules applicable to both the batch and
CDC sessions in Mapplets. For more information about Mapplets, see the PowerCenter
Designer Guide.

22

Chapter 3: Working with Mappings

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 23 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Source and Target Definitions


Both relational and non-relational sources and targets can be imported using the PowerCenter
Designer.
Figure 3-1. Import from PowerExchange

This displays the Import from PowerExchange dialog box. The process and the dialog box
displayed is the same for targets.

Source and Target Definitions

23

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 24 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Figure 3-2 shows the dialog box used to import all PowerExchange sources and targets,
including relational metadata, PowerExchange data maps, and PowerExchange capture
extraction maps:
Figure 3-2. Import from PowerExchange - Source

Additional input fields appear depending upon the Source Type chosen. You create the
source and target definitions differently depending on the database type.
After you create a source or target definition, you can edit it.
Note: The Owner name is included in the source definitions for relational metadata and in the

source and target definitions for PowerExchange data maps imported using this dialog. This
information is used, unless overridden, when the source or target is accessed from the
Integration Service node. This eliminates the need to provide the Owner Name attribute in
the Session Properties for all source types and Table Name Prefix attribute in the Session
Properties for non-relational PowerExchange targets.

24

Chapter 3: Working with Mappings

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 25 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Working with Relational Source and Target Definitions


With PowerExchange Client for PowerCenter, you can create source definitions to read from,
and target definitions to write to, the following relational databases:

DB2 UDB for z/OS (DB2/390)

DB2 UDB for iSeries (DB2/400)

DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows (DB2/UDB)

Microsoft SQL Server

Oracle

Sybase

Working with DB2 Definitions


You can create a DB2 source definition in the following ways:

Import table definitions from the DB2 catalog using PowerExchange.

Import DB2 or DB2 unload (DB2UNLD) data map definitions from PowerExchange. For
more information, see Importing Non-Relational Source Definitions on page 44.

Import extraction map definitions for PowerExchange. For more information, see
Working with Extraction Map Definitions on page 57.

Manually create a DB2 definition.

You can create a DB2 target definition in the following ways:

Import table definitions from the DB2 catalog using PowerExchange.

Manually create a DB2 definition.

Create a DB2 target definition from a DB2 source definition. In the Target Designer, drag
a DB2 source definition to the workspace.

See the PowerCenter Designer Guide for more information about using PowerCenter to create
source and target definitions.
Tip: If your repository already contains DB2 definitions, you can use them to extract data

from or load data to a DB2 table. However, the metadata definition must match the table
structure of the DB2 table.

Importing a DB2 Relational Source or Target Definition


You can connect to a DB2 database through a PowerExchange Listener, or locally without a
Listener, to import DB2 metadata. When you connect to the database, the Designer displays
database schemas and tables. Before you connect to the database, you can filter the metadata
the Designer displays by schema and/or table name.
Select a table to create the source or target definition. When you import a DB2 (390, 400, or
UDB) source or target definition through a PowerExchange Listener (or locally), the Designer
imports the primary keys.

Working with Relational Source and Target Definitions

25

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 26 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

DB2 tables that are mapped in PowerExchange as either DB2 data maps or DB2UNLD (DB2
database unload data set) data maps (DB2/390 only) are imported in the same manner as
non-relational data map sources. For more information on how to import these sources, see
Importing Non-Relational Source Definitions on page 44.
Use the following procedure to import DB2/390, DB2/400, and DB2/UDB source or target
definitions.
To import a DB2/390, DB2/400 or DB2/UDB source or target definition:
1.

To import a DB2 source definition, select Sources > Import from PowerExchange and
select a source type of DB2390, DB2400, or DB2UDB.
To import a DB2 target definition, select Targets > Import from PowerExchange and
select a source type of DB2390, DB2400, or DB2UDB.
The dialog box for a DB2/390 source definition import looks as follows:
Figure 3-3. Import from PowerExchange - DB2/390 Source

The target dialog box looks similar but does not contain the Multi-Record Datamaps and
CDC Datamaps options.

26

Chapter 3: Working with Mappings

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 27 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

The dialog box for a DB2/400 or a DB2/UDB source looks as follows:


Figure 3-4. Import from PowerExchange - DB2/400 or DB2/UDB Source

The target dialog box looks similar but does not contain the Multi-Record Datamaps and
CDC Datamaps options.
2.

Enter the following connection information:


Attribute

Required/
Optional

Location

Required

Name of the PowerExchange Listener (Node name from


PowerExchange dbmover.cfg) on the system on which the database
resides.

User Name

Required

User name for the database you want to connect to.

Password

Required

Password associated with the User name.

Multi-Record Datamaps

N/a

Select to list multi-record data maps. SEQ or VSAM sources only.

Source Type

Required

DB2390, DB2400, or DB2UDB.

CDC Datamaps

N/a

Select to list CDC extraction maps - source only.

Subsystem Id

Required

Name of the subsystem for connection. DB2390 only.

Description

Working with Relational Source and Target Definitions

27

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 28 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

3.

Attribute

Required/
Optional

Description

Database Name

Required

Name of the database for connection. DB2400 and DB2UDB only.

Schema

Optional

Enter a schema name to filter the resulting data maps.

Map name

Optional

Enter a table name to filter the resulting data maps.

Optionally, enter a filter to view particular schemas and tables from the database.
Enter a schema and/or table name. Or, enter a filter condition to display schemas and/or
tables that meet the filter condition. Use one of the following wildcard characters in the
filter condition:

* (asterisk). Represents one or more characters.

? (question mark). Represents one character.

Use the following syntax when entering a wildcard character:

Enter the filter condition as a prefix. For example, enter A* to display schemas and/or
tables that begin with an A.

Enter the filter condition as a suffix. For example, enter *A to display schemas and/or
tables that end with an A.

Enter the filter condition as a substring. For example, enter *cust* to display schemas
and/or tables that contain cust.

Note: Schema and table names are not case sensitive.


4.

Click Connect.
The available tables, based on the values specified in the dialog box, will appear in the
Selected Datamaps list.
If no tables are found, No Data Found will appear in the Selected Datamaps list.

28

Chapter 3: Working with Mappings

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 29 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

The Designer displays metadata to import.


Figure 3-5. Import from PowerExchange - DB2390 Select Datamaps List

Schema

Table

5.

6.

Select the table you want to import.

Hold down the Shift key to select blocks of tables.

Hold down the Ctrl key to make non-contiguous selections within a schema.

Use the Select all button to select all tables.

Use the Select none button to clear all highlighted selections.

Click OK.
The source or target definition appears in the workspace.

Working with Microsoft SQL Server Definitions


You can create a Microsoft SQL Server source definition in the following ways:

Import table definitions from Microsoft SQL Server using PowerExchange.

Import extraction map definitions from PowerExchange. For more information, see
Working with Extraction Map Definitions on page 57.

Working with Relational Source and Target Definitions

29

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 30 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Import table definitions from Microsoft SQL Server using the PowerCenter ODBC
interface.

Manually create a Microsoft SQL definition.

You can create a Microsoft SQL Server target definition in the following ways:

Import table definitions from Microsoft SQL Server using PowerExchange.

Import table definitions from Microsoft SQL Server using the PowerCenter ODBC
interface.

Manually create a Microsoft SQL definition.

See the PowerCenter Designer Guide for more information about using PowerCenter to create
source and target definitions.
Tip: If your repository contains Microsoft SQL Server definitions, you can use them to extract

data from or load data to a Microsoft SQL Server table. However, the metadata definition
must match the table structure of the Microsoft SQL Server table.

Importing a Microsoft SQL Server Relational Source or Target


Definition
You can connect to a Microsoft SQL Server database through a PowerExchange Listener, or
locally without a Listener, to import SQL Server metadata. When you connect to the
database, the Designer displays database schemas and tables. Before you connect to the
database, you can filter the metadata the Designer displays by schema and/or table name.
Select a table to create the source or target definition. When you import a Microsoft SQL
Server definition through a PowerExchange Listener or locally, the Designer imports the
primary keys.
Use the following procedure to import Microsoft SQL Server source or target definitions.
To import a Microsoft SQL Server source or target definition:
1.

To import a Microsoft SQL Server source definition, select Sources > Import from
PowerExchange and select a source type of MSSQL.
To import a Microsoft SQL Server target definition, select Targets > Import from
PowerExchange and select a source type of MSSQL.

30

Chapter 3: Working with Mappings

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 31 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

The dialog box for the Microsoft SQL Server source definition input looks as follows:
Figure 3-6. Import from PowerExchange - Microsoft SQL Server Source

The target dialog box looks similar but does not contain the Multi-Record Datamaps and
CDC Datamaps options.
2.

Enter the following connection information:


Attribute

Required/
Optional

Location

Required

Name of the PowerExchange Listener (Node name from


PowerExchange dbmover.cfg) on the system on which the database
resides.

User Name

Required

User ID for connection to the database.

Password

Required

Password associated with the User ID.

Multi-Record Datamaps

N/a

Select to list multi-record data maps. SEQ or VSAM sources only.

Source Type

Required

MSSQL.

CDC Datamaps

N/a

Select to list CDC extraction maps - source only

Server Name

Required

SQL Server instance name.

Description

Working with Relational Source and Target Definitions

31

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 32 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

3.

Attribute

Required/
Optional

Description

Database Name

Required

Database name in the SQL instance specified.

Schema

Optional

Enter a schema name to filter the resulting data maps.

Map name

Optional

Enter a table name to filter the resulting data maps.

Optionally, enter a filter to view particular schemas and tables from the database.
Enter a schema and/or table name. Or, enter a filter condition to display schemas and/or
tables that meet the filter condition. Use one of the following wildcard characters in the
filter condition:

* (asterisk). Represents one or more characters.

? (question mark). Represents one character.

Use the following syntax when entering a wildcard character:

Enter the filter condition as a prefix. For example, enter A* to display schemas and/or
tables that begin with an A.

Enter the filter condition as a suffix. For example, enter *A to display schemas and/or
tables that end with an A.

Enter the filter condition as a substring. For example, enter *cust* to display schemas
and/or tables that contain cust.

Note: Schema and table names are not case sensitive.


4.

Click Connect.
The available tables, based on the values specified in the dialog box, will appear in the
Selected Datamaps list.
If no tables are found, No Data Found will appear in the Selected Datamaps list.

32

Chapter 3: Working with Mappings

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 33 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

The Designer displays metadata to import.


Figure 3-7. Import from PowerExchange - MSSQL Select Datamaps List

Schema

Table

5.

6.

Select the table you want to import.

Hold down the Shift key to select blocks of tables.

Hold down the Ctrl key to make non-contiguous selections within a schema.

Use the Select all button to select all tables.

Use the Select none button to clear all highlighted selections.

Click OK.
The source or target definition appears in the workspace.

Working with Oracle Definitions


You can create an Oracle source definition in the following ways:

Import table definitions from Oracle using PowerExchange.

Import extraction map definitions from PowerExchange. For more information, see
Working with Extraction Map Definitions on page 57.

Working with Relational Source and Target Definitions

33

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 34 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Import table definitions from Oracle using the PowerCenter ODBC interface.

Manually create an Oracle source definition.

You can create an Oracle target definition in the following ways:

Import table definitions from Oracle using PowerExchange.

Import table definitions from Oracle using the PowerCenter ODBC interface.

Manually create an Oracle source definition. F

See the PowerCenter Designer Guide for more information about using PowerCenter to create
source and target definitions.
Tip: If your repository contains Oracle definitions, you can use them to extract data from or

load data to an Oracle table. However, the metadata definition must match the table structure
of the Oracle table.

Importing a Oracle Relational Source or Target Definition


You can connect to an Oracle database through a PowerExchange Listener, or locally without
a Listener, to import Oracle metadata. When you connect to the database, the Designer
displays database schemas and tables. Before you connect to the database, you can filter the
metadata the Designer displays by schema and/or table name.
Select a table to create the source or target definition. When you import an Oracle source
definition through a PowerExchange Listener, the Designer imports the primary keys.
Use the following procedure to import Oracle source or target definitions.
To import an Oracle source or target definition:
1.

To import an Oracle source definition, select Sources > Import from PowerExchange and
select a source type of Oracle.
To import an Oracle target definition, select Targets > Import from PowerExchange and
select a source type of Oracle.

34

Chapter 3: Working with Mappings

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 35 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

The Import from PowerExchange > Oracle dialog box looks as follows:
Figure 3-8. Import from PowerExchange - Oracle Source

The target dialog box looks similar but does not contain the Multi-Record Datamaps and
CDC Datamaps options.
2.

Enter the following connection information:


Attribute

Required/
Optional

Location

Required

Name of the PowerExchange Listener (Node name from


PowerExchange dbmover.cfg) on the system on which the database
resides.

User Name

Required

User name for the database connecting to.

Password

Required

Password associated with the user name.

Multi-Record Datamaps

N/a

Select to list multi-record data maps. SEQ or VSAM sources only.

Source Type

Required

ORACLE.

CDC Datamaps

N/a

Select to list CDC extraction maps - source only.

TNS Name

Required

Oracle SID (instance name).

Description

Working with Relational Source and Target Definitions

35

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 36 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

3.

Attribute

Required/
Optional

Description

Schema

Optional

Enter a schema name to filter the resulting data maps.

Map name

Optional

Enter a table name to filter the resulting data maps.

Optionally, enter a filter to view particular schemas and tables from the database.
Enter a schema and/or table name. Or, enter a filter condition to display schemas and/or
tables that meet the filter condition. Use one of the following wildcard characters in the
filter condition:

* (asterisk). Represents one or more characters.

? (question mark). Represents one character.

Use the following syntax when entering a wildcard character:

Enter the filter condition as a prefix. For example, enter A* to display schemas and/or
tables that begin with an A.

Enter the filter condition as a suffix. For example, enter *A to display schemas and/or
tables that end with an A.

Enter the filter condition as a substring. For example, enter *cust* to display schemas
and/or tables that contain cust.

Note: Schema and table names are not case sensitive.


4.

Click Connect.
The available tables, based on the values specified in the dialog box, will appear in the
Selected Datamaps list.
If no tables are found, No Data Found will appear in the Selected Datamaps list.

36

Chapter 3: Working with Mappings

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 37 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

The Designer displays metadata to import.


Figure 3-9. Import from PowerExchange - Oracle Select Datamaps List

Schema

Table

5.

6.

Select the table you want to import.

Hold down the Shift key to select blocks of tables.

Hold down the Ctrl key to make non-contiguous selections within a schema.

Use the Select all button to select all tables.

Use the Select none button to clear all highlighted selections.

Click OK.
The source or target definition appears in the workspace.

Working with Sybase Definitions


You can create a Sybase source definition in the following ways:

Import table definitions from Sybase using PowerExchange.

Import table definitions from Sybase using the PowerCenter ODBC interface.

Manually create an Sybase source definition.

Working with Relational Source and Target Definitions

37

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 38 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

You can create an Sybase target definition in the following ways:

Import table definitions from Sybase using PowerExchange.

Import table definitions from Sybase using the PowerCenter ODBC interface.

Manually create an Sybase target definition.

See the PowerCenter Designer Guide for more information about using PowerCenter to create
source and target definitions.
Tip: If your repository already contains Sybase definitions, you can use them to extract data

from a Sybase source. However, the metadata definition must match the table structure of the
Sybase table.

Importing a Sybase Relational Source or Target Definition


You can connect to an Sybase database through a PowerExchange Listener, or locally without
a Listener, to import Sybase metadata. When you connect to the database, the Designer
displays database schemas and tables. Before you connect to the database, you can filter the
metadata the Designer displays by schema and/or table name.
Select a table to create the source or target definition. When you import an Sybase source
definition through a PowerExchange Listener, the Designer imports the primary keys.
Use the following procedure to import Sybase source or target definitions.
To import an Sybase source or target definition:
1.

To import an Sybase source definition, select Sources > Import from PowerExchange and
select a source type of Sybase.
To import an Sybase target definition, select Targets > Import from PowerExchange and
select a source type of Sybase.

38

Chapter 3: Working with Mappings

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 39 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

The Import from PowerExchange > Sybase dialog box looks as follows:
Figure 3-10. Import from PowerExchange - Sybase Source

2.

Enter the following connection information:


Attribute

Required/
Optional

Location

Required

Name of the PowerExchange Listener (Node name from


PowerExchange dbmover.cfg) on the system on which the database
resides.

User Name

Required

User name for the database connecting to.

Password

Required

Password associated with the user name.

Multi-Record Datamaps

N/A

Select to list multi-record data maps. SEQ or VSAM sources only.

Source Type

Required

SYBASE.

CDC Datamaps

N/A

Select to list CDC extraction maps. N/A for Sybase.

Server Name

Required

Sybase Server Name.

Database Name

Required

Sybase Database Name.

Description

Working with Relational Source and Target Definitions

39

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 40 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

3.

Attribute

Required/
Optional

Description

Schema

Optional

Enter a schema name to filter the resulting data maps.

Map name

Optional

Enter a table name to filter the resulting data maps.

Optionally, enter a filter to view particular schemas and tables from the database.
Enter a schema and/or table name. Or, enter a filter condition to display schemas and/or
tables that meet the filter condition. Use one of the following wildcard characters in the
filter condition:

* (asterisk). Represents one or more characters.

? (question mark). Represents one character.

Use the following syntax when entering a wildcard character:

Enter the filter condition as a prefix. For example, enter A* to display schemas and/or
tables that begin with an A.

Enter the filter condition as a suffix. For example, enter *A to display schemas and/or
tables that end with an A.

Enter the filter condition as a substring. For example, enter *cust* to display schemas
and/or tables that contain cust.

Note: Schema and table names are not case sensitive.


4.

Click Connect.
The available tables, based on the values specified in the dialog box, will appear in the
Selected Datamaps list.
If no tables are found, No Data Found will appear in the Selected Datamaps list.

40

Chapter 3: Working with Mappings

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 41 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

The Designer displays metadata to import.


Figure 3-11. Import from PowerExchange - Sybase Select Datamaps List

Schema

Table

5.

6.

Select the table you want to import.

Hold down the Shift key to select blocks of tables.

Hold down the Ctrl key to make non-contiguous selections within a schema.

Use the Select all button to select all tables.

Use the Select none button to clear all highlighted selections.

Click OK.
The source or target definition appears in the workspace.

Editing Relational Source and Target Definitions


You can edit relational source and target definition to make minor changes to the definition.
For example, you can:

Modify column names.

Modify column data types.

Add or delete columns.

Working with Relational Source and Target Definitions

41

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 42 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Modify column key relationships.

Add a description of the definition.

Note: If using the relational source in a CDC session you do not need to add the

DTL__CAPXACTION field nor do you need to include an Update Strategy transformation.


PWXPC will automatically include the DTL__CAPXACTION column in its SELECT
statement for CDC sources. It then uses the value of the DTL__CAPXACTION to construct
the appropriate SQL statement (INSERT, UPDATE, or DELETE).
For more information about editing source and target definitions, see the PowerCenter
Designer Guide.

42

Chapter 3: Working with Mappings

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 43 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Working with Non-Relational Source and Target


Definitions
With PowerExchange Client for PowerCenter, you can create source definitions to read from,
and target definitions to write to, the following non-relational data types:

Adabas

Datacom - source only

DB2 data maps (DB2MAP) - source only

DB2/390 unload files (DB2UNLD) - source only

IDMS - source only

IMS

SEQ

VSAM

You can create a non-relational source and target definitions by importing a data map from a
PowerExchange Listener. Non-relational definitions represent the data map metadata in
groups. Each group represents a table in the data map. Each group also contains metadata for
the fields in the table.
The following diagram shows a non-relational source definition for a VSAM data map that
contains multiple tables representing multiple records in the VSAM file. The tables in the
VSAM data map are represented as groups in the source definition:
Figure 3-12. Non-Relational Source Definition with Multiple Records

A group represents
a table in the
PowerExchange
data map.

Group name

Working with Non-Relational Source and Target Definitions

43

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 44 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

In this example, the source definition contains four groups: V07A_RECORD_LAYOUT,


V07B_RECORD_LAYOUT, V07C_RECORD_LAYOUT and
V07D_RECORD_LAYOUT. These groups are tables in the data map. The groups contain
metadata for the fields in the tables.
Some data maps contain records that have hierarchical relationships with each other. For
example, records can have a parent/child relationships. When you import data maps with
hierarchies, the Designer imports the data map as a single group.

Importing Non-Relational Source Definitions


You can connect to PowerExchange locally or to a PowerExchange Listener to import a nonrelational source definition or a data mapped DB2 definition. When you connect to
PowerExchange, the Designer displays data map schemas and tables for the source type
specified. Before you connect to PowerExchange, you can filter the metadata the Designer
displays by schema and/or data map name. Select a data map to create the source definition.
The same procedure is used to import multi-record data maps (VSAM and sequential). Select
the Multi-Record Datamaps box on the Import dialog box to import multi-record data maps.
You can use the following procedure to import multi-record (VSAM and sequential only) or
single record data map source definitions.

44

Chapter 3: Working with Mappings

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 45 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

To import a non-relational source definition:


1.

To import a non-relational source definition, select Sources > Import from


PowerExchange and select the desired source type. The dialog box and parameters
displayed are the same for each non-relational source type.
The Import from PowerExchange dialog box looks as follows:
Figure 3-13. Import from PowerExchange - Non-Relational Source

2.

Enter the following connection information:


Attribute

Required/
Optional

Location

Required

Name of the PowerExchange Listener (Node name from


PowerExchange dbmover.cfg) on the system on which the database
resides.

User Name

Required

User name for the database to connect to.

Password

Required

Password associated with the User name.

Multi-Record Datamaps

Optional

Select to list multi-record data maps. SEQ or VSAM sources only.

Source Type

Required

Select one of the following source types: ADABAS, DATACOM,


DB2MAP, DB2UNLD, IDMS, IMS, SEQ, or VSAM.

Description

Working with Non-Relational Source and Target Definitions

45

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 46 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

3.

Attribute

Required/
Optional

Description

CDC Datamaps

n/a

Select to list CDC extraction maps - source only.

Schema

Optional

Enter a schema name to filter the resulting data maps.

Map name

Optional

Enter a data map name to filter the resulting data maps.

Selected Datamaps

n/a

Lists the available data maps for the connection, database and filter
details that you entered.

Optionally, enter a filter to view particular schemas and tables from the database.
Enter a schema and/or table name. Or, enter a filter condition to display schemas and/or
tables that meet the filter condition. Use one of the following wildcard characters in the
filter condition:

* (asterisk). Represents one or more characters.

? (question mark). Represents one character.

Use the following syntax when entering a wildcard character:

Enter the filter condition as a prefix. For example, enter A* to display schemas and/or
tables that begin with an A.

Enter the filter condition as a suffix. For example, enter *A to display schemas and/or
tables that end with an A.

Enter the filter condition as a substring. For example, enter *cust* to display schemas
and/or tables that contain cust.

Note: Schema and table names are not case sensitive.


4.

Click Connect. The available data maps appear in the Selected Datamaps list.
The Designer displays metadata to import. The following two examples show the results
when single record VSAM data maps and multi-record VSAM data maps are selected.
Each record in the multi-record data map will display in Selected Datamaps list when
importing single record data maps. Each record in a multi-record data map is effectively a
single record data map. It is possible to import only a single record within a multi-record
data map as a source.

46

Chapter 3: Working with Mappings

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 47 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

This example shows the results for single record VSAM data maps:
Figure 3-14. Import from PowerExchange - Single Record Source Data Maps

Schema

Table

Working with Non-Relational Source and Target Definitions

47

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 48 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

This example shows the results for multi-record VSAM data maps:
Figure 3-15. Import from PowerExchange - Multiple Record Source Data Maps

Schema
Table

5.

6.

Select the data map you want to import.

Hold down the Shift key to select blocks of tables.

Hold down the Ctrl key to make non-contiguous selections within a data map.

Use the Select all button to select all tables.

Use the Select none button to clear all highlighted selections.

Click OK.
The source definitions appear. The Designer uses the data map name as the name of the
source definition.

Importing Non-Relational Target Definitions


You can connect to PowerExchange locally or to a PowerExchange Listener to import a nonrelational target definition. When you connect to PowerExchange, the Designer displays data
map schemas and tables for the target type specified. Before you connect to PowerExchange,
you can filter the metadata the Designer displays by schema and/or data map name. Select a
data map to create the source definition.

48

Chapter 3: Working with Mappings

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 49 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

To import a non-relational target definition:


1.

To import a non-relational target definition, select Targets > Import from


PowerExchange and select the desired target type. The dialog box and parameters
displayed are the same for each non-relational source type.
The Import from PowerExchange dialog box for targets looks as follows:
Figure 3-16. Import from PowerExchange - Non-Relational Target

2.

Enter the following connection information:


Attribute

Required/
Optional

Location

Required

Name of the PowerExchange Listener (Node name from


PowerExchange dbmover.cfg) on the system on which the database
resides.

User Name

Required

User name for the database to connect to.

Password

Required

Password associated with the User name.

Source Type

Required

Select one of the following source types: ADABAS, IMS, SEQ, or


VSAM.

Schema

Optional

Enter a schema name to filter the resulting data maps.

Description

Working with Non-Relational Source and Target Definitions

49

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 50 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

3.

Attribute

Required/
Optional

Description

Map name

Optional

Enter a data map name to filter the resulting data maps.

Selected Datamaps

n/a

Lists the available data maps for the connection, database and filter
details that you entered.

Optionally, enter a filter to view particular schemas and tables from the database.
Enter a schema and/or table name. Or, enter a filter condition to display schemas and/or
tables that meet the filter condition. Use one of the following wildcard characters in the
filter condition:

* (asterisk). Represents one or more characters.

? (question mark). Represents one character.

Use the following syntax when entering a wildcard character:

Enter the filter condition as a prefix. For example, enter A* to display schemas and/or
tables that begin with an A.

Enter the filter condition as a suffix. For example, enter *A to display schemas and/or
tables that end with an A.

Enter the filter condition as a substring. For example, enter *cust* to display schemas
and/or tables that contain cust.

Note: Schema and table names are not case sensitive.


4.

50

Click Connect. The available data maps appear in the Selected Datamaps list. The
Designer displays metadata to import.

Chapter 3: Working with Mappings

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 51 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

The following example shows the results when a Source Type of VSAM is selected:
Figure 3-17. Import from PowerExchange - Non-Relational Target Select Datamaps List

Schema

Table

5.

6.

Select the data map you want to import.

Hold down the Shift key to select blocks of tables.

Hold down the Ctrl key to make non-contiguous selections within a data map.

Use the Select all button to select all tables.

Use the Select none button to clear all highlighted selections.

Click OK.
The source definitions appear. The Designer uses the data map name as the name of the
source definition.

Viewing Non-Relational Source and Target Definition Details


Non-relational source and target definitions contain information about the data map
structure on the Attributes tab. Additional metadata information is included on the Metadata
Extensions tab.

Working with Non-Relational Source and Target Definitions

51

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 52 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Viewing Data Map Information


The Attributes tab of a non-relational source or target definition lists each field in the
definition. It also lists the attributes of each field and their values from the data map used to
create the definition. The attributes include information such as the name of the base record
to which the field belongs.
Figure 3-18 shows the Attributes information for a non-relational VSAM definition:
Figure 3-18. Non-Relational Table - Attributes

Table 3-1 describes the attributes the Attributes tab displays for each field in the nonrelational definition:
Table 3-1. Attributes of Fields in a Non-Relational Source Definition
Attribute Name

Description

column_name

Name of the field in the data map.

base_rec

Name of the record to which the field belongs. This corresponds to name of the group the field
belongs to in the source definition.

base_fld

Name of the base record and table field name in the following format:
<Base_Field_Name>:<Table_Field_Name>

52

base_fld_tpe

PowerExchange data type of the field.

base_fld_offset

Offset value from which the field starts. For example, if the value is 5, the field starts at the fifth
position. You determine the offset value of each field based on the order of fields in the data
map.

Chapter 3: Working with Mappings

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 53 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Viewing Metadata Extensions


Non-relational source and target definitions have metadata extensions that displays additional
information from the data map used to create the definition. With VSAM and sequential
definitions, the File Name extension field can be modified. See Editing Metadata
Extensions on page 54.
You can override the data map name and schema name in the session properties. See Session
Properties for Non-Relational Batch Mode Sessions on page 129.
The following example shows the Metadata Extensions information for a VSAM definition:
Figure 3-19. Non-Relational Table - Metadata Extensions

The following table describes the extensions on the Metadata Extensions tab for a nonrelational definition:
Table 3-2. Non-Relational Source Definition Metadata Extensions
Extension Name

Description

Access Method

Method you specified in the data map to access the source database:
- A = Adabas
- D = IMS DL1
- E = VSAM ESDS
- I = IDMS
- K = VSAM KSDS
- O = IMS ODBA
- N = VSAM RRDS
- S = sequential (SEQ)
- W = DB2 unload file (DB2UNLD)
- X = Datacom
- Z = DB2 data map

comments

Any comments.

Working with Non-Relational Source and Target Definitions

53

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 54 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Table 3-2. Non-Relational Source Definition Metadata Extensions


Extension Name

Description

File Name

Name of the data set (sequential or VSAM only)

Map Name

Name of the data map.

Schema Name

Name of the schema on which you based the data map.

Editing Non-Relational Source and Target Definitions


You can edit non-relational source and target definitions to make minor changes to the
definition. For example, you can:

Modify a column data type

Modify the owner name

Modify column key relationships

Add or delete columns

Add a description of the definition

Create metadata extensions

Note: If using the non-relational source in a CDC session you do not need to add the

DTL__CAPXACTION field nor do you need to include an Update Strategy transformation.


PWXPC will automatically include the DTL__CAPXACTION column in its SELECT
statement for CDC sources. It then uses the value of the DTL__CAPXACTION to construct
the appropriate SQL statement (INSERT, UPDATE, or DELETE).
For more information about editing source definitions, see the PowerCenter Designer Guide.

Editing Metadata Extensions


With VSAM and sequential definitions, the File Name extension field can be modified. All
other field populated by PWXPC when a data map is imported cannot be changed.
By default, the File Name field contains the value from the PowerExchange data map File
Name field which contains the VSAM data set name or the sequential file name.
Note: Any VSAM and sequential definitions created prior to PowerCenter V8.5 will have a

blank File Name. If desired, this field can be populated manually or by re-importing the data
map.

54

Chapter 3: Working with Mappings

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 55 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

The following procedure explains how to manually update the File Name field to add or
change the file name in a VSAM or sequential definition.
To manually update the file name field:
1.

Double-click the source or target definition in the workspace.

2.

Select the Metadata Extensions tab.


PWXPC populates the File Name field with the File Name for the PowerExchange data
map. The following example shows the metadata extensions for a VSAM definition. The
VSAM was created prior to PowerCenter V8.5 so the File Name field is blank.

3.

Click in the Value field and select the down arrow.

Working with Non-Relational Source and Target Definitions

55

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 56 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

The Edit Metadata Extension Value panel displays allowing you to enter or change the
file name.

Click OK when done.


4.

Click OK to end Edit Tables.

You can also re-import the PowerExchange data map to automatically populate the File Name
field with the information contained in the data map.

56

Chapter 3: Working with Mappings

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 57 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Working with Extraction Map Definitions


When creating mappings for Change Data Capture (CDC), import the extraction map rather
than the source table metadata. Extraction maps are imported using the Import from
PowerExchange dialog box and are uniquely suited for the following cases:

The extraction map for the source contains a subset of the actual columns defined for the
source.

The PowerExchange generated columns like DTL__CAPXTIMESTAMP,


DTL__CAPXACTION, and DTL__BI before image columns are needed.

You can connect to PowerExchange locally or to a PowerExchange Listener to import an


extraction map definition. Connect to the capture source platform location where the
extraction maps are stored.
When you connect to PowerExchange, the Designer displays the extraction map schemas and
tables. Before you connect to PowerExchange, you can filter the metadata the Designer
displays by schema and/or data map name. Select an extraction map to create the source
definition.
To import an extraction map as a source definition
1.

To import an extraction map source definition, select Sources > Import from
PowerExchange and select the CDC Datamaps box and then select the desired source
type.
The dialog box and parameters displayed are the same for each non-relational source
type.

Working with Extraction Map Definitions

57

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 58 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

The Import from PowerExchange dialog box appears as follows:


Figure 3-20. Import from PowerExchange - CDC Datamaps

Enter the following connection information:

58

Attribute

Required/
Optional

Location

Required

Name of the PowerExchange Listener (Node name from


PowerExchange dbmover.cfg) on the system on which the database
resides.

User Name

Required

User name for the database connecting to.

Password

Required

Password associated with the User name.

Multi-Record Datamaps

N/a

Select to list multi-record data maps. SEQ or VSAM sources only.

Source Type

Required

Select one of the following source types: ADABAS, DATACOM,


DB2390, DB2400, DB2UDB, IDMS, IMS, MSSQL, ORACLE or VSAM.

CDC Datamaps

Required

Select to list CDC extraction maps - source only.

Schema

Optional

Enter a schema name to filter the resulting data maps.

Map name

Optional

Enter a data map name to filter the resulting data maps.

Chapter 3: Working with Mappings

Description

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 59 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

2.

Optionally, enter a filter to view particular schemas and tables from the database.
Enter a schema, table name, or both. Or enter a filter condition to display schemas or
tables that meet the filter condition. Use one of the following wildcard characters in the
filter condition:

* (asterisk). Represents one or more characters.

? (question mark). Represents one character.

Use the following syntax when entering a wildcard character:

Enter the filter condition as a prefix. For example, enter A* to display schemas or
tables that begin with an A.

Enter the filter condition as a suffix. For example, enter *A to display schemas or
tables that end with an A.

Enter the filter condition as a substring. For example, enter *cust* to display schemas
or tables that contain cust.

Note: Schema and table names are not case sensitive.


3.

Click Connect. The Designer displays the metadata to import. The extraction maps
shown will be filtered based on the source type specified.
Figure 3-21. Import from PowerExchange - CDC Select Datamaps List

Schema

Table

Working with Extraction Map Definitions

59

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 60 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

In this example, only extraction maps for a specific Schema and Map name appear in the
Designer.
4.

5.

Select the data map you want to import.

Hold down the Shift key to select blocks of tables.

Hold down the Ctrl key to make non-contiguous selections within a data map.

Use the Select all button to select all tables.

Use the Select none button to clear all highlighted selections.

Click OK.
The source definition appears in the workspace. The Designer uses the data map name as
the name of the source definition.

Viewing Extraction Map Definition Details


Extraction map definitions contain information about the data map structure on the
Attributes tab. They also contain metadata extensions on the Metadata Extensions tab.

Viewing Extraction Map Information


The Attributes tab of a extraction map definition lists each field in the source definition. It
also lists the attributes of each field and their values based on the extraction map from which
you imported the source definition. The attributes include information such as the name of
the base record to which the field belongs.
Figure 3-22 shows the Attributes tab of a extraction map definition:
Figure 3-22. Extraction Map Table - Attributes

60

Chapter 3: Working with Mappings

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 61 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Table 3-3 describes the attributes that the Attributes tab displays for each field in the source
definition:
Table 3-3. Attributes of Fields in a Extraction Map Definition
Attribute Name

Description

column_name

Name of the field in the extraction map.

base_rec

blank.

base_fld

blank

base_fld_tpe

blank.

base_fld_offset

blank

Viewing Metadata Extensions


Extraction map definitions have metadata extensions that display information about the data
map on which you based the source definition. You cannot modify these metadata extensions.
However, you can override the data map name and schema name in the session properties.
The following example shows the Metadata Extensions tab of a extraction map definition:
Figure 3-23. Extraction Map Table - Metadata Extensions

Working with Extraction Map Definitions

61

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 62 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

The following table describes the extensions on the Metadata Extensions tab for an extraction
map definition:
Table 3-4. Extraction Map Definition Metadata Extensions
Extension Name

Description

Access Method

Method you specified in the data map to access the source database:
- A = Adabas
- B = DB2/390 and DB2/400
- D = IMS
- E = VSAM ESDS
- I = IDMS
- K = VSAM KSDS
- L = MSSQL
- N = VSAM RRDS
- P = Oracle
- V = DB2/UDB
- X = Datacom

comments

Any comments.

Map Name

Name of the extraction map.

Original Name

Original table name in relational database or PowerExchange data map.

Original Schema

Original schema or owner name in relational database or PowerExchange data map.

Schema Name

Name of the schema for the extraction map.

Editing a Extraction Map Definition


You can edit extraction map definitions to make minor changes to the definition. For
example, you can:

Modify a column data type.

Modify the owner name.

Add or delete columns.

Add a description of the definition.

Create metadata extensions.

When using extraction maps, you do not need to add the DTL__CAPXACTION field nor do
you need to include an Update Strategy transformation. PWXPC will automatically include
the DTL__CAPXACTION column in its SELECT statement for CDC sources. It then uses
the value of the DTL__CAPXACTION to construct the appropriate SQL statement
(INSERT, UPDATE, or DELETE).
Warning: Changing column information in the extraction map could result in failures in the
session or workflow during the extraction process.

For more information about editing source definitions, see the PowerCenter Designer Guide.

62

Chapter 3: Working with Mappings

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 63 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Previewing PowerExchange Data in Designer


You can preview data in the Designer for any valid relational and non-relational source or
target definitions. You can also preview changed data for extraction map source definitions.
You cannot preview data for multi-record data map source definitions.
Previewing data allows you to see the source or target data. The data that is shown depends
upon the database type of the source or target definition. There are three database types for
PowerExchange source and target definitions:
1.

Relational, such as DB2 for DB2 metadata.

2.

Non-relational, such as PWX_VSAM_NRDB2 for VSAM data maps.

3.

Extraction Maps, such as PWX_DB2390_CDC for DB2 CDC data maps.

You can preview source or target data in the following Designer tools:

Source Analyzer. Preview source data in the Source Analyzer after you import the source.

Target Designer. Preview target data in the Target Designer after you import a target.

Mapplet Designer. Preview source data in the Mapplet Designer while creating a mapplet.

Mapping Designer. Preview source and target data in the Mapping Designer while
creating a mapping.

For sources and targets other than those accessed through PowerExchange, see the
PowerCenter Designer Guide.

Previewing PowerExchange Relational Data


Previewing data for source or target relational definitions displays data from the relational
table. You must be able to connect to PowerExchange on the source or target database
platform to preview data.
Note: Previewing data requires an ODBC data source to connect to PowerExchange.
To preview relational source or target data:
1.

Select a relational source or target definition in the workspace.

2.

Right-click the source or target definition in the workspace and choose Preview Data.

Previewing PowerExchange Data in Designer

63

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 64 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

The Preview Data dialog box appears.

3.

Select an ODBC data source name.


You can add a new ODBC data source using the ... button.

4.

If necessary, enter the Username and Password.


For PowerExchange sources and targets on MVS and AS/400, this is only necessary if
connecting to a PowerExchange Listener configured with security (SECURITY=1 or
SECURITY=2 in DBMOVER).

5.

Enter the database table owner name.

6.

Enter the number of rows you want to preview.


The default is 100. The Preview Data dialog box can display up to 500 rows and up to
65,000 columns.

7.

64

Click Connect.

Chapter 3: Working with Mappings

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 65 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

The contents of the table appear in the Preview Data dialog box.

8.

To change the number of rows you want to preview, enter a new number and click
Refresh.

9.

Click Close to exit.

Previewing PowerExchange Non-Relational Data


Previewing data for source or target non-relational definitions displays data from the nonrelational file. In the case of DB2 data maps, data from the source DB2 table displays.
Previewing data for non-relational definitions uses PWXPC to connect to PowerExchange.
You must be able to connect to PowerExchange on the source or target platform to preview
data.
To preview non-relational source or target data:
1.

Select a non-relational source or target definition in the workspace.

2.

Right-click the source or target definition in the workspace and choose Preview Data.

Previewing PowerExchange Data in Designer

65

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 66 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

The Preview Data dialog box appears.

3.

Select a Location name.


The Location names are retrieved from the NODE statements in the dbmover.cfg file on
the Designer platform. To add additional Locations, edit this file and add additional
NODE statements.

4.

If necessary, enter the Username and Password.


For PowerExchange sources and targets on MVS and AS/400, this is only necessary if
connecting to a PowerExchange Listener configured with security (SECURITY=1 or
SECURITY=2 in DBMOVER).

5.

The Schema field is automatically populated with the PowerExchange data map schema
name. This can be changed if desired.

6.

Enter the number of rows you want to preview.


The default is 10. The Preview Data dialog box can display up to 500 rows and up to
65,000 columns.

7.

66

Click Connect.

Chapter 3: Working with Mappings

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 67 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

The contents of the table appear in the Preview Data dialog box.

8.

To return more data, click More.

9.

To change the number of rows you want to preview, enter a new number and click
Connect.

10.

Click Close to exit.

Previewing PowerExchange Changed Data


Previewing data for extraction map (CDC datamaps) definitions displays changed data from
the change stream. Previewing data for extraction maps uses PWXPC to connect to
PowerExchange.
You must be able to connect to PowerExchange on the source platform to preview data.
To preview changed data:
1.

Select an extraction map source definition in the workspace.

2.

Right-click the source definition in the workspace and choose Preview Data.

Previewing PowerExchange Data in Designer

67

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 68 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

The Preview Data dialog box appears.

3.

Select a Location name.


The Location names are retrieved from the NODE statements in the dbmover.cfg file on
the Designer platform. To add additional Locations, edit this file and add additional
NODE statements.

4.

If necessary, enter the Username and Password.


For PowerExchange sources and targets on MVS and AS/400, this is only necessary if
connecting to a PowerExchange Listener configured with security (SECURITY=1 or
SECURITY=2 in DBMOVER).

5.

The Schema field is automatically populated with the PowerExchange extraction map
schema name. This can be changed if desired.

6.

Select either Real Time or Change.


Real Time extracts data in real-time from the change stream using the earliest starting
restart point. Change extracts data from condense files using the earliest starting restart
point. See Default Restart Points on page 157 for more information about default
restart points.

7.
68

If desired, change the Time Out value.

Chapter 3: Working with Mappings

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 69 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

The time out value indicates the maximum time (in seconds) to wait for additional data
at the end of log. After this time period expires, EOF is returned and the number of rows
requested is displayed. Returning EOF terminates any further retrieval of data from the
change stream.
The default is 10 seconds. The value can be any number between 0 and 86400. A value of
0 indicates that EOF is returned as soon as the end of log is reached whereas 86400
indicates that EOF is never returned. Do not specify 86400 as no data is displayed and
the Preview Data session hangs until the extraction task in PowerExchange Listener is
stopped.
8.

Enter the number of rows you want to preview.


The default is 10. The Preview Data dialog box can display up to 500 rows and up to
65,000 columns.

9.

Click Connect.
The contents of the table appear in the Preview Data dialog box.

10.

To return more data, click More.


When the end of log is reached, the More button is greyed out.

Previewing PowerExchange Data in Designer

69

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 70 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

70

11.

To change the number of rows you want to preview, enter a new number and click
Connect.

12.

Click Close to exit.

Chapter 3: Working with Mappings

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 71 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

PowerExchange Group Source


PowerExchange Client for PowerCenter uses PowerExchange Group Source functionality.
Group Source is used when reading Changed Data Capture (CDC) data. It can also be used
when processing VSAM and sequential datasets or files that have multiple record types.
Group Source allows PowerExchange to read all data from the same physical source in a single
pass. For CDC data, this means that changes for all tables defined in the mapping can be read
from the change stream in a single pass. For multi-record VSAM or sequential data sets, the
file needs only be read once to acquire all of the record types. Records are then provided to
the appropriate source in the mapping.
This provides enhanced performance by eliminating multiple passes of the data. It also
reduces the resource consumption of PowerExchange on the platform from which the data is
being extracted.

Using Group Source with Non-Relational Sources


VSAM and sequential datasets that contain multiple record types with physically different
record layouts in a single data set are candidates for Group Source. Within PowerExchange
each record type is separately defined as a unique record in the data map. This results in
separate tables to represent the relational view of each record.
Traditionally, the table for each record type would be imported into PowerCenter Designer
thereby decoupling the relational view of the data from the physical data set. As a result, the
data set would be read in its entirety for each of the different record types imported. For
example, a sequential data set containing three different record layouts would be read, in its
entirety, three times to provide the data to each record type.
With PWXPC, the Group Source functionality of PowerExchange can be used for multirecord VSAM and sequential datasets resulting in the data set/file being read only once
regardless of the number of unique record types that exist. To exploit this functionality, the
metadata must be imported as a multi-record data map in Designer. This is done by selecting
the Multi-record Datamaps box on the Import dialog box. For more information on how to
do this, see Importing Non-Relational Source Definitions on page 44.
Non-relational source definitions represent the data map metadata in groups. Each group
represents a table in the data map. Each group also contains metadata for the fields in the
table.

PowerExchange Group Source

71

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 72 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Figure 3-24 shows a non-relational source definition with multiple groups:


Figure 3-24. Multi-record Non-Relational Source Definition
PowerExchange map
name

PowerExchange
data map table name

The PowerExchange NRDB Batch application connection is used to read the data and uses
Group Source functionality. Group Source processing for multi-record non-relational data
maps is done for each source definition. Each source definition in a mapping will result in a
connection to PowerExchange to read the source data. It is possible to have multiple multirecord source definitions in a mapping and each one can use Group Source processing.

Using Group Source with CDC Sources


With PWXPC, the Group Source functionality of PowerExchange can be used for all CDC
sources resulting in the change stream for the CDC source being read only once, for each
unique source type, regardless of the number of source tables included in the mapping.
You can create a CDC source definition that can use group source in the following ways:

72

Import table definitions from the relational database using PowerExchange. For more
information, see Working with Relational Source and Target Definitions on page 25.

Import data map table definitions from PowerExchange (non-relational and DB2/390
sources). For more information, see Working with Non-Relational Source and Target
Definitions on page 43.

Import extraction map definitions from PowerExchange for all source types. For more
information, see Working with Extraction Map Definitions on page 57.

Import relational table definitions using the PowerCenter ODBC interface. For more
information, see the PowerCenter Designer Guide.

Chapter 3: Working with Mappings

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 73 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

For non-relational CDC sources, the source metadata must be imported using PWXPC.
Tip: Use extraction maps, or CDC Datamaps, for CDC sources as this eliminates the need to

specify the extraction map name in the Session Properties. It also eliminates the need to add
any of the special DTL columns: the DTL__CAPX fields, the DTL__CI change indicator
fields, and the DTL__BI before image fields. This can significantly simplify the mapping
design process.
Group Source functionality is invoked for each source type. A mapping should contain only a
specific source type. Sessions with a mappings containing multiple source types, even if the
same change stream is being read, will fail with:
PWXPC_10080 [ERROR] All the readers should be of one database type only

For example, a mapping containing both VSAM and IMS sources will fail with the 10080
message. Two separate mappings should be made: one for the VSAM sources and one for the
IMS sources. If these two mappings are included in two sessions in the same workflow, they
result in separate Group Source connections to the change stream: one for VSAM and one for
IMS.
Group Source for batch access to non-relational sources requires that the source be imported
as a multi-record data map and is used for an individual source definition. With CDC access,
group source is invoked at a mapping level for all source definitions rather than at an
individual source definition level.
The invocation of Group Source occurs automatically when a PWX Change or Real-Time
connection is used in a session, regardless of the number of sources included in the session. It
also occurs automatically if a multi-record source definition exists in a mapping.
The following diagram shows an example of a mapping for three DB2 sources:
Figure 3-25. Group Source Mapping Example

PowerExchange Group Source

73

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 74 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

When you include this mapping in a session that uses the PowerExchange DB2 CDC
application connection, PowerExchange reads through the change stream a single time, using
Group Source, to extract the changes for all three source tables. The changes for each source
are provided to the source qualifier in the chronological order in which each unit of work
(UOW) completed.
When you include this mapping in a session that uses a PowerExchange DB2 relational
connection, PowerExchange reads each source table separately. A unique pipeline is created
for each source which results in three unique tasks in the PowerExchange Listener.

74

Chapter 3: Working with Mappings

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 75 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Working with Source Qualifiers


Source qualifiers determine how the Integration Service reads data from the source. You
connect a source qualifier to a source instance in a mapping. The type of source qualifier you
use depends on the source definition:

Relational source definitions use a Source Qualifier transformation.

Non-relational source definitions use an Application Multi-Group Source Qualifier


transformation.

Transformation Datatypes
The transformation datatypes in Source Qualifier and Application Multi-Group Source
Qualifier transformations are internal datatypes based on ANSI SQL-92 generic datatypes,
which PowerCenter uses to move data across platforms. When the Integration Service reads
data from a source, it converts the data from the PowerExchange data type to the
transformation data type. When you run a session, the Integration Service performs
transformations based on the transformation datatypes. When writing data to a target, the
Integration Service converts the data based on the datatypes in the target definition.
The transformation data type for all ports in the Application Multi-Group Source Qualifier
transformation are predefined. You cannot change the data type for any of the fields in the
Application Multi-Group Source Qualifier transformations. For more information about
transformation datatypes, see the PowerCenter Designer Guide.

Creating Source Qualifiers


By default, the PowerCenter Designer creates an Application Multi-Group Source Qualifier
transformation when you add a non-relational source definition to a mapping. Similarly, it
creates a Source Qualifier transformation when you add a relational source definition to a
mapping.
If you configure the PowerCenter Designer to manually create a source qualifier when you
add a source definition to a mapping, you must manually connect the source qualifier to the
source definition.
For more information about source qualifiers, see the PowerCenter Transformation Guide.

Editing Source Qualifier Transformations


After you create a Source Qualifier transformation, you can edit the transformation. You
cannot edit an Application Multi-Group Source Qualifier transformation. For more
information about Source Qualifier transformations, see the PowerCenter Transformation
Guide.

Working with Source Qualifiers

75

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 76 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Using Lookup Transformations


This section discusses considerations for using lookup transformations with PWXPC for
PowerExchange sources and targets. See the PowerCenter Transformation Guide for more
information about Lookup transformations and lookup caching.
Use a Lookup transformation in a mapping to look up data, through PowerExchange, in a
non-relational file or a relational table, view, or synonym. You can import a lookup definition
for any flat file, non-relational file, or relational table to which both the PowerCenter Client
and Integration Service can connect.

Usage Considerations for PowerExchange Sources and Targets


There are a number of unique usage considerations for using Lookup transformations with
PowerExchange sources and targets. These are listed below:

The Lookup transformation import process uses ODBC for non-relational files and
relational tables.
To use PWXPC to import definitions for non-relational files or relational tables, first
import the definitions using the Import from PowerExchange dialog box in either the
Source Analyzer or Target Designer prior to configuring the lookup in the mapping.

You can use PWXPC connections for lookup both non-relational files and relational
tables:

For relational tables, select the appropriate PWXPC relational connection for the
database type, such as PWX DB2390, PWX DB2400, PWX DB2UDB, PWX Microsoft
SQL Server, PWX Oracle, or PWX Sybase. See Configuring Connections on page 83
for connection configuration information.

For non-relational files, select the PWXPC relational connection for NRDB lookups,
PWX NRDB Lookup. See NRDB Lookup Relational Connections on page 96 for
connection configuration information.

When using Lookup transformations with a resume recovery strategy, select the Lookup
source is static transformation attribute to avoid failures during session execution.

When using Lookup transformations with IMS databases, careful consideration needs to
be given to the fields used to perform the search of the IMS database. Concatenated keys
(CCK) fields achieve the best performance with the least impact on the IMS database. For
more information about search fields for IMS lookups, see Configuring Lookups for
IMS on page 76.

When using Lookup transformations for targets being updated with CDC data in the same
mapping, use special custom properties to ensure change stream data is accessible across
pipelines. For more information, see Configuring Lookups for CDC Data on page 77.

Configuring Lookups for IMS


Using keys is a fast and efficient method of retrieving data from IMS databases.
PowerExchange allows you to build Concatenated Key (CCK) fields in the data map.
76

Chapter 3: Working with Mappings

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 77 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Concatenated Key (CCK) fields allows PowerExchange to construct a fully-qualified Segment


Search Argument (SSA) thereby improving IMS database search efficiency. See the
PowerExchange IMS Adapter Guide for more information about creating CCK fields.
Fields specified in the Lookup condition transformation attribute are used by PowerExchange
to create the Segment Search Argument (SSA). In order for a field to be used in the SSA, it
must be marked as a key in the IMS source or target definition in Designer.
To provide search keys for IMS database lookups, use the following types of fields in the
Lookup condition transformation attribute:

Concatenated Key (CCK) fields. Specify these fields as keys in the IMS source or target
definition and use them in the Lookup condition attribute. Using CCK fields results in the
most efficient search of the IMS database.

Key fields. Specify these fields as key in the IMS source or target definition and use them
in the Lookup condition attribute. You can specify either the CCK field or the key field for
the desired segment as both will exist in the IMS source or target definition. If the segment
is not the root, a combination of both CCK fields and key fields will likely be needed in
the Lookup condition.

Search fields defined in the IMS Database Definition (DBD). Specify these as keys in the
IMS source or target definition and use them in the Lookup condition attribute. If the
segment does not have a key, IMS can still scan the IMS segments using an IMS search
field. This type of search call is not as efficient as a keyed search with CCK fields or key
fields. Assuming the root segment is keyed, include its CCK field with the search fields to
limit the amount of data IMS scans and therefore the impact on the database.

Non-key or non-search fields. The least efficient search method is to mark non-key fields
or non-search fields as keys in the IMS source or target definition and in the Lookup
condition attribute. This causes a scan of the IMS database to be done in order to find a
match. This can adversely affect your IMS operational system and therefore should be
avoided.

Tip: You can limit the amount of the database that will be scanned by specifying as many CCK

and key fields as possible. If using Search fields, include as many CCK fields as possible and,
at minimum, the root CCK field. Only use non-key or non-search fields as a last resort.

Configuring Lookups for CDC Data


Lookup transformations can be used in mappings extracting data from CDC sources
including tables to which the CDC data is being applied.
If you are using dynamic lookups for CDC data and sharing the lookup cache with other
static lookups in the same mapping, specify both of the following custom properties in the
session Custom Properties attribute field on the Config Object tab:

MergeCDCReaders=Yes

SingleThreadExecutionModel=Yes

These custom properties remove any partition points from the PWXPC CDC Reader through
the transformations to the Writer. As a result, the order of the changes read from the change

Using Lookup Transformations

77

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 78 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

stream is maintained until the changes reach the Writer. This then ensures that any CDC data
placed into a dynamic lookup cache is accessible to lookups sharing that cache in other
pipelines.
Warning: The use of these custom properties will impact session throughput as it will singlethread all source data from the Reader through to the Writer. As a result, these custom
properties should only be specified when there is a need to share CDC data stored in a
dynamic cache across pipeline.

78

Chapter 3: Working with Mappings

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 79 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Chapter 4

Configuring Connections

This chapter includes the following topics:

Overview, 80

DB2 Batch Mode Relational Database Connections, 86

DB2 CDC Mode Application Connections, 89

NRDB Batch Mode Application Connections, 92

NRDB CDC Mode Application Connections, 93

NRDB Lookup Relational Connections, 96

MSSQL Batch Mode Relational Connections, 97

MSSQL CDC Mode Application Connections, 99

Oracle Batch Mode Relational Connections, 102

Oracle CDC Mode Application Connections, 104

Sybase Batch Mode Relational Connections, 107

Configuring Connection Attributes, 108

Understanding Commit Processing with PWXPC, 123

79

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 80 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Overview
Before the Integration Service can access a source or target in a session, you must configure
connections in the Workflow Manager. When you create or modify a session that reads from
or writes to a database of file, you can select only configured source and target databases.
Connections are saved in the repository.
For PowerExchange Client for PowerCenter, you configure relational database or application
connections, depending upon the source or the target type.

Connection Types for Extracting Source Data


The connection you configure depends on the type of source data you want to extract and the
extraction mode.
Table 4-1 describes the connections you create for data extraction based on the data source
and the extraction mode:
Table 4-1. Connection Types for Extracting Source Data
Source Type

Extraction Mode

Connection Type

Connection Name

Adabas

Batch

Application

PWX NRDB Batch

Change

Application

PWX NRDB CDC Change

Real-Time

Application

PWX NRDB CDC Real Time

Batch

Application

PWX NRDB Batch

Change

Application

PWX NRDB CDC Change

Real-Time

Application

PWX NRDB CDC Real Time

Batch

Relational

PWX DB2390

Change

Application

PWX DB2390 CDC Change

Real-Time

Application

PWX DB2390 CDC Real Time

Batch

Relational

PWX DB2400

Change

Application

PWX DB2400 CDC Change

Real-Time

Application

PWX DB2400 CDC Real Time

Batch

Relational

PWX DB2UDB

Change

n/a

n/a

Real-Time

Application

PWX DB2UDB CDC Real Time

Batch

Application

PWX NRDB Batch

Change

Application

PWX NRDB CDC Change

Real-Time

Application

PWX NRDB CDC Real Time

Datacom

DB2 for z/OS

DB2 for i5/OS

DB2 for Linux,


UNIX, and
Windows

IDMS

80

Chapter 4: Configuring Connections

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 81 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Table 4-1. Connection Types for Extracting Source Data


Source Type

Extraction Mode

Connection Type

Connection Name

IMS

Batch

Application

PWX NRDB Batch

Change

Application

PWX NRDB CDC Change

Real-Time

Application

PWX NRDB CDC Real Time

Batch

Relational

PWX MSSQLServer

Change

n/a

n/a

Real-Time

Application

PWX MSSQL CDC Real Time

Batch

Relational

PWX Oracle

Change

Application

PWX Oracle CDC Change

Real-Time

Application

PWX Oracle CDC Real Time

Batch

Application

PWX NRDB Batch

Change

n/a

n/a

Real-Time

n/a

n/a

Batch

Relational

PWX Sybase

Change

n/a

n/a

Real-Time

n/a

n/a

Batch

Application

PWX NRDB Batch

Change

Application

PWX NRDB CDC Change

Real-Time

Application

PWX NRDB CDC Real Time

Microsoft SQL
Server

Oracle

Sequential and
flat files

Sybase

VSAM

Connection Types for Loading Target Data


The connection you configure depends on the type of target data you want to load.
Table 4-2 describes the relational database connections you create to load data to supported
PowerExchange targets:
Table 4-2. Connection Types for Loading Target Data
Target Type

Connection

Connection Type

Adabas

Application

PWX NRDB Batch

DB2 for z/OS

Relational

PWX DB2390

DB2 for i5/OS

Relational

PWX DB2400

DB2 for Linux, UNIX,


and Windows

Relational

PWX DB2UDB

IMS

Application

PWX NRDB Batch

Overview

81

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 82 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Table 4-2. Connection Types for Loading Target Data

82

Target Type

Connection

Connection Type

Microsoft SQL Server

Relational

PWX MSSQLServer

Oracle

Relational

PWX Oracle

Sequential and flat files

Application

PWX NRDB Batch

Sybase

Relational

PWX Sybase

VSAM

Application

PWX NRDB Batch

Chapter 4: Configuring Connections

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 83 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Configuring Connections
The connection you configure depends upon the database or data structure.
Source and target connections can be configured for:

Extracting data (Batch) from relational or non-relational sources.

Extracting changed data (Change or Real-Time) from non-relational or relational sources.

Loading data (Batch) to a relational target.

Loading data (Batch) to a non-relational target.

For more information about available connection types, see Table 4-1 on page 80 and
Table 4-2 on page 81.
To configure connections:
1.

In the Workflow Manager, connect to a PowerCenter repository.

2.

To configure a PowerExchange Batch relational database connection, click Connections


> Relational. The Relational Connection Browser dialog box appears:
Figure 4-1. Relational Connection Browser

Configuring Connections

83

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 84 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

To configure a PowerExchange application connection, click Connections > Application.


The Application Connection Browser dialog box appears:
Figure 4-2. Application Connection Browser

In the Select Type field, select the type of connection you want to create. For a list of
connections to configure according to data source and extraction mode, see Table 4-1 on
page 80. For a list of connections to configure according to target data type, see Table 42 on page 81.
3.

84

Click New.

Chapter 4: Configuring Connections

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 85 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

The Connection Object Definition dialog box appears. The relational and application
dialog boxes are very similar. An application dialog box is shown here:
Figure 4-3. Application Connection Editor

4.

Enter the values for the connection attributes. The various connection types are
described in subsequent sections in this chapter.

5.

Click OK.
The new connection appears in the Application or Relational Object Browser.

To edit or delete a relational database or application connections, select the connection from
the list and click the appropriate button.

Configuring Connections

85

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 86 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

DB2 Batch Mode Relational Database Connections


Configure relational database connections for DB2 for z/OS, DB2 for i5/OS, and DB2 for
Linux, UNIX, and Windows to extract data and load data in batch mode to DB2 sources and
targets.
Table 4-3 describes the connection attributes you configure for PWX DB2390, DB2400, and
DB2UDB relational database connections:
Table 4-3. PWX DB2390, DB2400, and DB2UDB Relational Database Connection Attributes
Connection
Attribute

Required

DB2390
DB2400
DB2UDB

Description

Name

Yes

All

Name of the relational database connection.

Code Page

Yes

All

Select the code page for the Integration Server to use to extract
data from the source database.
Note: In Unicode mode, PWXPC sets the code page with this value
overriding any code page specification in the PowerExchange
configuration file.

Location

Yes

All

Location of the source or target database as specified as a node in


the PowerExchange configuration file dbmover.cfg.

Database Name

Yes

All

DB2 subsystem or database instance name.

User Name

Yes

All

User name for the database connected to.

Password

Yes

All

Password for the user name.

Isolation Level

Yes

DB2400

Commit scope of the transaction.


Default is CS.

Database file
overrides

No

DB2400

Overrides any occurrence of the specified filename (in any SQL


statement) with the library/filename/member specified, regardless
of whether the file is qualified or not. This includes any files
qualified using Library List.
Separate libraries with semicolons.
Note: If both Library List and Database file overrides are specified
and a table exists both, the Database file overrides takes
precedence.

Library List

No

DB2400

List of libraries that PowerExchange searches to qualify the table


name for Select, Insert, Delete Or Update statements.
PowerExchange searches the list if the table name is unqualified.
Separate libraries with semicolons.
Note: If both Library List and Database file overrides are specified
and a table exists both, the Database file overrides takes
precedence.

86

Environment SQL

No

All

SQL commands run in the database environment.

Compression

No

All

Select to compress source data during the PowerCenter session.


See Configuring Encryption and Compression on page 108.

Chapter 4: Configuring Connections

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 87 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Table 4-3. PWX DB2390, DB2400, and DB2UDB Relational Database Connection Attributes
Connection
Attribute

Required

DB2390
DB2400
DB2UDB

Encryption Type

Yes

All

Select the encryption type.


See Configuring Encryption and Compression on page 108.

Encryption Level

No

All

Select the encryption level.


See Configuring Encryption and Compression on page 108.

Pacing Size

Yes

All

Enter the pacing size.


See Configuring Pacing on page 109.

Interpret as Rows

No

All

Specifies whether, or not, pacing size is in number of rows.


See Configuring Pacing on page 109.

Bulk Load*

No

DB2390

Select to cause PowerExchange to load data to DB2 for z/OS


targets using the DB2LOAD utility. If you select this option, you can
configure the remaining connection attributes. Otherwise, the
PowerExchange ignores these attributes.

Filename*

No

DB2390

Specifies the data set prefix PowerExchange uses to create the


temporary files needed when using the DB2 LOAD utility to load
data into a DB2 table.

Space*

Yes

DB2390

Enter one of the following values to allocate MVS space in tracks


or cylinders:
- TRACK
- CYLINDER
Default is TRACK.

Primary Space*

Yes

DB2390

Value for the primary space on MVS. Default is 0.

Secondary Space*

Yes

DB2390

Value for the secondary space on MVS. Default is 0.

Delete Temporary
Files*

Yes

DB2390

Specifies how PowerExchange should handle the temporary files it


creates when using the DB2 LOAD utility to load data into a DB2
table. Select one of the following values:
- NO does not delete the temporary files.
- BEFORE deletes the temporary files before running the utility.
- AFTER SUCCESS ONLY deletes the temporary files after
running the utility if it ends with a return code 0.
- AFTER deletes the temporary files after running the utility.
Default is NO.

JCL Template*

Yes

DB2390

Specifies the name of the JCL template for the DB2 LOAD utility on
the PowerExchange target system.
Default is DB2LDJCL.

CTL Template*

Yes

DB2390

Specifies the name of the control file template for the DB2 LOAD
utility on the PowerExchange on the target system.
Default is DB2LDCTL.

Description

DB2 Batch Mode Relational Database Connections

87

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 88 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Table 4-3. PWX DB2390, DB2400, and DB2UDB Relational Database Connection Attributes
Connection
Attribute

Required

DB2390
DB2400
DB2UDB

Load Options*

Yes

DB2390

Specifies how PowerExchange should handle the data when using


the DB2 LOAD utility to load data into a DB2 table. Select one of
the following values:
- INSERT
- REPLACE
Default is INSERT.

Mode Type*

Yes

DB2390

Specifies how PowerExchange should run the DB2 LOAD utility to


load data into a DB2 table. Select one of the following values:
- TASK runs the LOAD utility as a sub-task under the
PowerExchange Listener.
- JOB submits a separate job to run the DB2 LOAD utility.
- NOSUBMIT creates the files and JCL to run the DB2 LOAD utility
but does not submit the job.
Default is TASK.

Mode Time*

Yes

DB2390

Specifies how PowerExchange handles the execution of the DB2


LOAD utility. Select one of the following values:
- WAIT waits for the job to end before returning control to
PowerCenter. WAIT can only be specified with Mode Type JOB or
TASK.
- NO WAIT returns to PowerCenter without waiting for the job to
end. NO WAIT can only be specified with Mode Type JOB or
NOSUBMIT.
- TIMED waits the number of seconds specified In TIme before
returning control to PowerCenter. TIMED can only be specified
with Mode Type JOB.
- DATAONLY creates the files and JCL to run the DB2 LOAD utility
but does not submit the job.
Default is WAIT.

Time*

Yes

DB2390

Specifies the wait time in seconds when you select JOB for the
Mode Type and TIMED for Mode Time.
Valid values are 1 to 99998.
Default is 0.

Convert character
data to string

No

All

Convert embedded nulls in character fields to spaces.


See Converting Character Data to Strings on page 110.
Default is no.

Write Mode

No

All

Select the write mode. See Configuring Write Mode on page 111.
Default is Confirm Write On.

Reject File

No

All

Overrides the default prefix of PWXR for the reject file.


PowerExchange creates the reject file on the target machine when
the Write Mode is Asynchronous with Fault Tolerance.

Description

Note: Specifying PWXDISABLE will prevent creation of the reject


files.
See the PowerExchange Reference Manual for further information.
*For more information, see the PowerExchange Reference Manual.

88

Chapter 4: Configuring Connections

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 89 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

DB2 CDC Mode Application Connections


Configure application connections to extract data from DB2 for z/OS and DB2 for i5/OS in
real-time or change modes. Configure application connections to extract data from DB2 for
Linux, UNIX, and Windows in real-time mode. For a list of connections to configure
according to data source and extraction mode, see Table 4-1 on page 80.
Table 4-4 describes the connection attributes you configure for DB2390, DB2400 and
DB2UDB application connections:
Table 4-4. DB2390, DB2400, and DB2UDB CDC Mode Application Connection Attributes
Connection
Attribute

Required

Change or
Real-time

Description

Name

Yes

Both

Name of the relational database connection.

Code Page

Yes

Both

Select the code page for the Integration Service to use to extract
data from the source database.
Note: In Unicode mode, PWXPC sets the code page with this
value overriding any code page specification in the
PowerExchange configuration file.

Location

Yes

Both

Location of the source or target database as specified as a node


in the PowerExchange configuration file dbmover.cfg.

User Name

Yes

Both

User name for DB2.

Password

Yes

Both

Password for the user name.

Compression

No

Both

Select to compress source data during the PowerCenter


session.
See Configuring Encryption and Compression on page 108.

Encryption Type

Yes

Both

Select the encryption type.


See Configuring Encryption and Compression on page 108.

Encryption Level

No

Both

Select the encryption level.


See Configuring Encryption and Compression on page 108.

Pacing Size

Yes

Both

Enter the pacing size.


See Configuring Pacing on page 109.

Interpret as Rows

No

Both

Specifies whether, or not, pacing size is in number of rows.


See Configuring Pacing on page 109.

Image Type

No

Both

Select the image type.


See Configuring Image Type on page 113.
Default is BA.

Application Name

No

Both

Specify the Application Name.


See Configuring CDC Restart Attributes on page 117.
Default is the first 20 characters of the workflow name.

RestartToken File
Folder

Yes

Both

Specify the Restart token folder.


See Configuring CDC Restart Attributes on page 117.
Default is $PMRootDir/Restart.

DB2 CDC Mode Application Connections

89

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 90 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Table 4-4. DB2390, DB2400, and DB2UDB CDC Mode Application Connection Attributes
Connection
Attribute

Required

Change or
Real-time

RestartToken File
Name

No

Both

Specify the Restart token file.


See Configuring CDC Restart Attributes on page 117.
Default is the Application Name if specified or the workflow
name if Application Name is not specified.

Number of Runs to
Keep RestartToken
File

No

Both

Specify the maximum number of backup copies to keep of the


Restart Token File.
See Managing Session Log and Restart Token File History on
page 175.
Default is 0.

Recovery Cache
Folder

No

Both

Specify file cache folder to enable recovery for the session. See
Enabling Session Recovery on page 165.
Default is $PMRootDir/Cache.

UOW Count

No

Both

Specifies the number of units of work (UOWs) you want the


PWXPC to read from the source before flushing data to the
target.

Description

If you enter:
-1 = UOW count is not used
0 = UOW count is not used
n = n is the count of UOWs
See Configuring UOW Count on page 118 and Understanding
Commit Processing with PWXPC on page 123.
Default is 1.
Reader Time Limit

No

Real Time

Specifies the number of seconds that Integration Service reads


data from the source before stopping.
If you enter 0, Reader Time Limit does not limit the reader time.
This attribute is intended for testing purposes only.
Tip: Use Idle Time instead of Reader Time Limit.
Default is 0.

Idle Time

No

Real Time

Specifies the number of seconds the PowerExchange Listener


remains idle after reaching the end of the change log (as
indicated by message PWX-09967) before returning an end-offile (EOF).
If you enter:
-1 = EOF is never retuned; the session runs continuously.
0 = EOF is returned at the end of log; the session terminates
successfully.
n = n is the number of seconds.
See Configuring Idle Time on page 115.
Default is -1.

90

Chapter 4: Configuring Connections

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 91 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Table 4-4. DB2390, DB2400, and DB2UDB CDC Mode Application Connection Attributes
Connection
Attribute

Required

Change or
Real-time

Real-Time Flush
Latency

No

Real Time

Specifies the milliseconds between buffer flushes.


Valid values are between 0 and 86400 milliseconds. PWXPC
sets values between 0 and 2000 to 2000.
See Configuring Real-Time Flush Latency on page 119.
Default is 0.

Commit Threshold

No

Real Time

Specifies the number of change records (not UOWs) after which


a commit should be inserted into the change stream.
See Configuring Commit Threshold on page 121.
Default is 0.

Journal Name*

No

Both

Overrides the library and journal name in the PowerExchange


CAPI_CONNECTION.
Specify complete library and journal names in the format:
library/journal

Library/File
Override*

No

Both

Overrides the library and file name in the extraction map.


Specify complete library and file names in the format:
library/file
This attribute overrides the Library/File Override value on the
application connection.
Warning: Do not specify an asterisk for library name if using
PWXPC restart.

Convert character
data to string

No

Both

Converts embedded nulls in character fields to spaces.


See Converting Character Data to Strings on page 110.
Default is no.

Event Table

No

Real Time

Specifies the PowerExchange extraction map name used for


event processing.
See Configuring Event Table Processing on page 114..

CAPI Connection
Name Override

No

Real Time

Overrides the default CAPI connection name.


See Configuring the CAPI Connection Name Override on
page 115.

Retrieve PWX Log


Entries

No

Both

Includes all related PowerExchange log entries in the session


log.
See Retrieving PWX Log Entries on page 112.

Description

* These attributes only apply to PWX CDC DB2400 Real Time application connections.

DB2 CDC Mode Application Connections

91

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 92 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

NRDB Batch Mode Application Connections


Configure application connections to extract data from non-relational databases (NRDB) in
batch mode. For a list of connections to configure according to data source and extraction
mode, see Table 4-1 on page 80.
Table 4-5 describes the connection attributes you configure for non-relational batch mode
application connections:
Table 4-5. NRDB Batch Mode Application Connection Attributes
Connection
Attribute

Required

Description

Name

Yes

Name of the relational database connection.

Code Page

Yes

Select the code page for the Integration Service to use to extract data from the
source database.
Note: In Unicode mode, PWXPC sets the code page with this value overriding any
code page specification in the PowerExchange configuration file.

92

Location

Yes

Location of the source or target database as specified as a node in the


PowerExchange configuration file dbmover.cfg.

User Name

Yes

User name for the database being connected to.

Password

Yes

Password for the user name.

Compression

No

Select to compress source data during the PowerCenter session. See


Configuring Encryption and Compression on page 108.

Encryption Type

No

Select the encryption type.


See Configuring Encryption and Compression on page 108.

Encryption Level

No

Select the encryption level.


See Configuring Encryption and Compression on page 108.

Pacing Size

No

Enter the pacing size.


See Configuring Pacing on page 109.

Interpret as Rows

No

Specifies whether, or not, pacing size is in number of rows.


See Configuring Pacing on page 109.

Confirm Write

No

Selects the write mode. See Configuring Write Mode on page 111.
Default is Confirm Write On.

Convert character
data to string

No

Convert embedded nulls in character fields to spaces.


See Converting Character Data to Strings on page 110.
Default is no.

Retrieve PWX Log


Entries

No

Include all related PowerExchange log entries in the session log.

Chapter 4: Configuring Connections

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 93 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

NRDB CDC Mode Application Connections


Configure application connections to extract data from non-relational databases in change
mode or real-time mode. For a list of connections to configure according to data source and
extraction mode, see Table 4-1 on page 80.
Table 4-6 describes the connection attributes you configure for non-relational database
change and real-time mode application connections:
Table 4-6. NRDB CDC Mode Application Connection Attributes
Connection
Attribute

Required

Change or
Real-time

Description

Name

Yes

Both

Name of the application connection.

Code Page

Yes

Both

Select the code page for the Integration Service to use to extract
data from the source database.
Note: In Unicode mode, PWXPC sets the code page with this
value overriding any code page specification in the
PowerExchange configuration file.

Location

Yes

Both

Location of the source or target database as specified as a node


in the PowerExchange configuration file dbmover.cfg.

User Name

Yes

Both

User name for the database being connected to.

Password

Yes

Both

Password for the user name.

Compression

No

Both

Select to compress source data during the PowerCenter


session. See Configuring Encryption and Compression on
page 108.

Encryption Type

Yes

Both

Select the encryption type.


See Configuring Encryption and Compression on page 108.

Encryption Level

No

Both

Select the encryption level.


See Configuring Encryption and Compression on page 108.

Pacing Size

Yes

Both

Enter the pacing size.


See Configuring Pacing on page 109.

Interpret as Rows

No

Both

Specifies whether, or not, pacing size is in number of rows.


See Configuring Pacing on page 109.

Image Type

No

Both

Select the image type.


See Configuring Image Type on page 113.
Default is BA.

Application Name

No

Both

Specify the Application Name.


See Configuring CDC Restart Attributes on page 117.
Default is the first 20 characters of the workflow name.

RestartToken File
Folder

Yes

Both

Specify the Restart token folder.


See Configuring CDC Restart Attributes on page 117.
Default is $PMRootDir/Restart.

NRDB CDC Mode Application Connections

93

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 94 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Table 4-6. NRDB CDC Mode Application Connection Attributes


Connection
Attribute

Required

Change or
Real-time

RestartToken File
Name

No

Both

Specify the Restart token file.


See Configuring CDC Restart Attributes on page 117.
Default is the Application Name if specified or the workflow
name if Application Name is not specified.

Number of Runs to
Keep RestartToken
File

No

Both

Specify the maximum number of backup copies to keep of the


Restart Token File.
See Managing Session Log and Restart Token File History on
page 175.
Default is 0.

Recovery Cache
Folder

No

Both

Specify file cache folder to enable recovery for the session. See
Enabling Session Recovery on page 165.
Default is $PMRootDir/Cache.

UOW Count

No

Both

Specifies the number of units of work (UOWs) you want the


PWXPC to read from the source before flushing data to the
target.

Description

If you enter:
-1 = UOW count is not used
0 = UOW count is not used
n = n is the count of UOWs
See Configuring UOW Count on page 118 and Understanding
Commit Processing with PWXPC on page 123.
Default is 1.
Reader Time Limit

No

Real Time

Specifies the number of seconds that Integration Service reads


data from the source before stopping.
If you enter 0, Reader Time Limit does not limit the reader time.
This attribute is intended for testing purposes only.
Tip: Use Idle Time instead of Reader Time Limit.
Default is 0.

Idle Time

No

Real Time

Specifies the number of seconds the PowerExchange Listener


remains idle after reaching the end of the change log (as
indicated by message PWX-09967) before returning an end-offile (EOF).
If you enter:
-1 = EOF is never retuned; the session runs continuously.
0 = EOF is returned at the end of log; the session terminates
successfully.
n = n is the number of seconds.
See Configuring Idle Time on page 115.
Default is -1.

94

Chapter 4: Configuring Connections

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 95 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Table 4-6. NRDB CDC Mode Application Connection Attributes


Connection
Attribute

Required

Change or
Real-time

Real-Time Flush
Latency

No

Real Time

Specifies the milliseconds between buffer flushes.


Valid values are between 0 and 86400 milliseconds. PWXPC
sets values between 0 and 2000 to 2000.
See Configuring Real-Time Flush Latency on page 119.
Default is 0.

Commit Threshold

No

Real Time

Specifies the number of change records (not UOWs) after which


a commit should be inserted into the change stream.
See Configuring Commit Threshold on page 121.
Default is 0.

Convert character
data to string

No

Both

Convert embedded nulls in character fields to spaces.


See Converting Character Data to Strings on page 110.
Default is no.

Event Table

No

Real Time

Specifies the PowerExchange extraction map name used for


event processing.
See Configuring Event Table Processing on page 114.

CAPI Connection
Name Override

No

Real Time

Overrides the default CAPI connection name.


See Configuring the CAPI Connection Name Override on
page 115

Retrieve PWX Log


Entries

No

Both

Include all related PowerExchange log entries in the session log.

Description

NRDB CDC Mode Application Connections

95

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 96 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

NRDB Lookup Relational Connections


Configure NRDB Lookup relational database connections when using lookups to extract data
from PowerExchange non-relational source and target definitions. For more information
about using lookups for non-relational definitions, see Using Lookup Transformations on
page 76.
Table 4-7 describes the connection attributes you configure for NRDB Lookup relational
database connections:
Table 4-7. NRDB Lookup Relational Connection Attributes
Connection
Attribute

Required

Description

Name

Yes

Name of the relational database connection.

Code Page

Yes

Select the code page for the Integration Service to use to extract data from the
source database.
Note: In Unicode mode, PWXPC sets the code page with this value overriding any
code page specification in the PowerExchange configuration file.

96

Location

Yes

Location of the source or target database as specified as a node in the


PowerExchange configuration file dbmover.cfg.

User Name

Yes

User name for the Listener being connected to.

Password

Yes

Password for the user name.

Environment SQL

No

SQL commands run in the database environment.

Compression

No

Select to compress source data during the PowerCenter session. See


Configuring Encryption and Compression on page 108.

Encryption Type

No

Select the encryption type.


See Configuring Encryption and Compression on page 108.

Encryption Level

No

Select the encryption level.


See Configuring Encryption and Compression on page 108.

Pacing Size

No

Enter the pacing size.


See Configuring Pacing on page 109.

Interpret as Rows

No

Specifies whether, or not, pacing size is in number of rows.


See Configuring Pacing on page 109.

Convert character
data to string

No

Convert embedded nulls in character fields to spaces.


See Converting Character Data to Strings on page 110.
Default is no.

Chapter 4: Configuring Connections

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 97 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

MSSQL Batch Mode Relational Connections


Configure relational database connections for Microsoft SQL Server to extract data and load
data in batch mode to SQL Server sources and targets.
Table 4-8 describes the connection attributes you configure for Microsoft SQL Server
relational database connections:
Table 4-8. MSSQL Batch Mode Relational Connection Attributes
Connection
Attribute

Required

Description

Name

Yes

Name of the relational database connection.

Code Page

Yes

Select the code page for the Integration Service to use to extract data from the
source database.
Note: In Unicode mode, PWXPC sets the code page with this value overriding any
code page specification in the PowerExchange configuration file.

Location

Yes

Location of the source or target database as specified as a node in the


PowerExchange configuration file dbmover.cfg.

Server Name

Yes

Name of the SQL Server instance.

Database Name

Yes

Name of the database in the SQL Server instance.

User Name

Yes

User name for the database being connected to.

Password

Yes

Password for the user name.

Environment SQL

No

SQL commands run in the database environment.

Compression

No

Select to compress source data during the PowerCenter session.


For more information, see Configuring Encryption and Compression on
page 108.

Encryption Type

No

Select the encryption type.


For more information, see Configuring Encryption and Compression on
page 108.
Default is None.

Encryption Level

No

Select the encryption level.


For more information, see Configuring Encryption and Compression on
page 108.
Default is 1.

Pacing Size

No

Enter the pacing size.


For more information, see Configuring Pacing on page 109.
Default is 0.

Interpret as Rows

No

Specifies whether, or not, pacing size is in number of rows.


For more information, see Configuring Pacing on page 109.

MSSQL Batch Mode Relational Connections

97

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 98 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Table 4-8. MSSQL Batch Mode Relational Connection Attributes


Connection
Attribute

98

Required

Description

Convert character
data to string

No

Convert embedded nulls in character fields to spaces.


See Converting Character Data to Strings on page 110.
Default is no.

Write Mode

No

Select the write mode. See Configuring Write Mode on page 111.
Default is Confirm Write On.

Chapter 4: Configuring Connections

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 99 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

MSSQL CDC Mode Application Connections


Configure a PWX MSSQL CDC Real Time application connection to extract data from
Microsoft SQL Server in real-time mode.
Table 4-9 describes the connection attributes you configure for Microsoft SQL Server realtime mode application connections:
Table 4-9. MSSQL CDC Mode Application Connection Attributes
Connection
Attribute

Required

Description

Name

Yes

Name of the application connection.

Code Page

Yes

Select the code page for the Integration Service to use to extract data from the
source database.
Note: In Unicode mode, PWXPC sets the code page with this value overriding
any code page specification in the PowerExchange configuration file.

Location

Yes

Location of the source or target database as specified as a node in the


PowerExchange configuration file dbmover.cfg.

User Name

Yes

User name for the Microsoft SQL Server database.

Password

Yes

Password for the user name.

Compression

No

Select to compress source data during the PowerCenter session. See


Configuring Encryption and Compression on page 108.

Encryption Type

Yes

Select the encryption type.


See Configuring Encryption and Compression on page 108.

Encryption Level

No

Select the encryption level.


See Configuring Encryption and Compression on page 108.

Pacing Size

Yes

Enter the pacing size.


See Configuring Pacing on page 109.

Interpret as Rows

No

Specifies whether, or not, pacing size is in number of rows.


See Configuring Pacing on page 109.

Image Type

No

Select the image type.


See Configuring Image Type on page 113.
Default is BA.

Application Name

No

Specify the Application Name.


See Configuring CDC Restart Attributes on page 117.
Default is the first 20 characters of the workflow name.

RestartToken File
Folder

Yes

Specify the Restart token folder.


See Configuring CDC Restart Attributes on page 117.
Default is $PMRootDir/Restart.

RestartToken File
Name

No

Specify the Restart token file.


See Configuring CDC Restart Attributes on page 117.
Default is the Application Name if specified or the workflow name if Application
Name is not specified.

MSSQL CDC Mode Application Connections

99

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 100 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Table 4-9. MSSQL CDC Mode Application Connection Attributes


Connection
Attribute

Required

Description

Number of Runs to
Keep RestartToken
File

No

Specify the maximum number of backup copies to keep of the Restart Token
File.
See Managing Session Log and Restart Token File History on page 175.
Default is 0.

Recovery Cache
Folder

No

Specify file cache folder to enable recovery for the session. See Enabling
Session Recovery on page 165.
Default is $PMRootDir/Cache.

UOW Count

No

Specifies the number of units of work (UOWs) you want the PWXPC to read
from the source before flushing data to the target.
If you enter:
-1 = UOW count is not used
0 = UOW count is not used
n = n is the count of UOWs
See Configuring UOW Count on page 118 and Understanding Commit
Processing with PWXPC on page 123.
Default is 1.

Reader Time Limit

No

Specifies the number of seconds that Integration Service reads data from the
source before stopping.
If you enter 0, Reader Time Limit does not limit the reader time. This attribute
is intended for testing purposes only.
Tip: Use Idle Time instead of Reader Time Limit.
Default is 0.

Idle Time

No

Specifies the number of seconds the PowerExchange Listener remains idle


after reaching the end of the change log (as indicated by message PWX09967) before returning an end-of-file (EOF).
If you enter:
-1 = EOF is never retuned; the session runs continuously.
0 = EOF is returned at the end of log; the session terminates successfully.
n = n is the number of seconds.
See Configuring Idle Time on page 115.
Default is -1.

100

Real-Time Flush
Latency

No

Specifies the milliseconds between buffer flushes.


Valid values are between 0 and 86400 milliseconds. PWXPC sets values
between 0 and 2000 to 2000.
See Configuring Real-Time Flush Latency on page 119.
Default is 0.

Commit Threshold

No

Specifies the number of change records (not UOWs) after which a commit
should be inserted into the change stream.
See Configuring Commit Threshold on page 121.
Default is 0.

Chapter 4: Configuring Connections

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 101 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Table 4-9. MSSQL CDC Mode Application Connection Attributes


Connection
Attribute

Required

Description

Convert character
data to string

No

Convert embedded nulls in character fields to spaces.


See Converting Character Data to Strings on page 110.
Default is no.

Event Table

No

Specifies the PowerExchange extraction map name used for event processing.
SeeConfiguring Event Table Processing on page 114.

CAPI Connection
Name Override

No

Overrides the default CAPI connection name.


See Configuring the CAPI Connection Name Override on page 115.

Retrieve PWX Log


Entries

No

Include all related PowerExchange log entries in the session log.

MSSQL CDC Mode Application Connections

101

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 102 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Oracle Batch Mode Relational Connections


Configure relational database connections for Oracle to extract data and load data in batch
mode to Oracle sources and targets.
Table 4-10 describes the connection attributes you configure for Oracle relational database
connections:
Table 4-10. Oracle Batch Mode Relational Connection Attributes
Connection
Attribute

Required

Description

Name

Yes

Name of the relational database connection.

Code Page

Yes

Select the code page for the Integration Service to use to extract data from the
source database.
Note: In Unicode mode, PWXPC sets the code page with this value overriding any
code page specification in the PowerExchange configuration file.

102

Location

Yes

Location of the source or target database as specified as a node in the


PowerExchange configuration file dbmover.cfg.

TNS Name

Yes

Net Service Name of the Oracle instance.

User Name

Yes

User name for the database being connected to.

Password

Yes

Password for the user name.

Environment SQL

No

SQL commands run in the database environment.

Compression

No

Select to compress source data during the PowerCenter session. See


Configuring Encryption and Compression on page 108.

Encryption Type

No

Select the encryption type.


See Configuring Encryption and Compression on page 108.

Encryption Level

No

Select the encryption level.


See Configuring Encryption and Compression on page 108.

Pacing Size

No

Enter the pacing size.


See Configuring Pacing on page 109.

Interpret as Rows

No

Specifies whether, or not, pacing size is in number of rows.


See Configuring Pacing on page 109.

Convert character
data to string

No

Convert embedded nulls in character fields to spaces.


See Converting Character Data to Strings on page 110.
Default is no.

Chapter 4: Configuring Connections

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 103 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Table 4-10. Oracle Batch Mode Relational Connection Attributes


Connection
Attribute

Required

Description

Write Mode

No

Select the write mode. See Configuring Write Mode on page 111.
Default is Confirm Write On.

Reject File

No

Overrides the default prefix of PWXR for the reject file.


PowerExchange creates the reject file on the target machine when the Write Mode
is Asynchronous with Fault Tolerance.
Note: Specifying PWXDISABLE will prevent creation of the reject files.
See the PowerExchange Reference Manual for further information.

Oracle Batch Mode Relational Connections

103

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 104 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Oracle CDC Mode Application Connections


Configure a PWX Oracle Change Capture Real Time application connection to extract data
from Oracle in real-time mode.
Table 4-11 describes the connection attributes you configure for Oracle real-time mode
application connections:
Table 4-11. Oracle CDC Mode Application Connection Attributes
Connection
Attribute

Required

Change or
Real-time

Description

Name

Yes

Both

Name of the application connection.

Code Page

Yes

Both

Select the code page for the Integration Service to use to extract
data from the source database.
Note: In Unicode mode, PWXPC sets the code page with this
value overriding any code page specification in the
PowerExchange configuration file.

104

Location

Yes

Both

Location of the source or target database as specified as a node


in the PowerExchange configuration file dbmover.cfg.

User Name

Yes

Both

User name for Oracle.

Password

Yes

Both

Password for the user name.

Compression

No

Both

Select to compress source data during the PowerCenter


session. See Configuring Encryption and Compression on
page 108.

Encryption Type

Yes

Both

Select the encryption type.


See Configuring Encryption and Compression on page 108.

Encryption Level

No

Both

Select the encryption level.


See Configuring Encryption and Compression on page 108.

Pacing Size

Yes

Both

Enter the pacing size.


See Configuring Pacing on page 109.

Interpret as Rows

No

Both

Specifies whether, or not, pacing size is in number of rows.


See Configuring Pacing on page 109.

Image Type

No

Both

Select the image type.


See Configuring Image Type on page 113.
Default is BA.

Application Name

No

Both

Specify the Application Name.


See Configuring CDC Restart Attributes on page 117.
Default is the first 20 characters of the workflow name.

RestartToken File
Folder

Yes

Both

Specify the Restart token folder.


See Configuring CDC Restart Attributes on page 117.
Default is $PMRootDir/Restart.

Chapter 4: Configuring Connections

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 105 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Table 4-11. Oracle CDC Mode Application Connection Attributes


Connection
Attribute

Required

Change or
Real-time

RestartToken File
Name

No

Both

Specify the Restart token file.


See Configuring CDC Restart Attributes on page 117.
Default is the Application Name if specified or the workflow
name if Application Name is not specified.

Number of Runs to
Keep RestartToken
File

No

Both

Specify the maximum number of backup copies to keep of the


Restart Token File.
See Managing Session Log and Restart Token File History on
page 175.
Default is 0.

Recovery Cache
Folder

No

Both

Specify file cache folder to enable recovery for the session. See
Enabling Session Recovery on page 165.
Default is $PMRootDir/Cache.

UOW Count

No

Both

Specifies the number of units of work (UOWs) you want the


PWXPC to read from the source before flushing data to the
target.

Description

If you enter:
-1 = UOW count is not used
0 = UOW count is not used
n = n is the count of UOWs
See Configuring UOW Count on page 118 and Understanding
Commit Processing with PWXPC on page 123.
Default is 1.
Reader Time Limit

No

Real Time

Specifies the number of seconds that Integration Service reads


data from the source before stopping.
If you enter 0, Reader Time Limit does not limit the reader time.
This attribute is intended for testing purposes only.
Tip: Use Idle Time instead of Reader Time Limit.
Default is 0.

Idle Time

No

Real Time

Specifies the number of seconds the PowerExchange Listener


remains idle after reaching the end of the change log (as
indicated by message PWX-09967) before returning an end-offile (EOF).
If you enter:
-1 = EOF is never retuned; the session runs continuously.
0 = EOF is returned at the end of log; the session terminates
successfully.
n = n is the number of seconds.
See Configuring Idle Time on page 115.
Default is -1.

Oracle CDC Mode Application Connections

105

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 106 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Table 4-11. Oracle CDC Mode Application Connection Attributes


Connection
Attribute

106

Required

Change or
Real-time

Real-Time Flush
Latency

No

Real Time

Specifies the milliseconds between buffer flushes.


Valid values are between 0 and 86400 milliseconds. PWXPC
sets values between 0 and 2000 to 2000.
See Configuring Real-Time Flush Latency on page 119.
Default is 0.

Commit Threshold

No

Real Time

Specifies the number of change records (not UOWs) after which


a commit should be inserted into the change stream.
See Configuring Commit Threshold on page 121.
Default is 0.

Instance Name

No

Real Time

Overrides the instance information in the ORACLEID statement


in the PowerExchange configuration file (dbmover.cfg).
For more information, see the PowerExchange Oracle Adapter
Guide.

Connect String

No

Real Time

Overrides the connection value in the ORACLEID statement in


the PowerExchange configuration file (dbmover.cfg).
For more information, see the PowerExchange Oracle Adapter
Guide.

Source Schema
Name

No

Both

Overrides the schema name for a group of registrations.


For more information, see the PowerExchange Oracle Adapter
Guide.

Convert character
data to string

No

Both

Convert embedded nulls in character fields to spaces.


See Converting Character Data to Strings on page 110.
Default is no.

Event Table

No

Real Time

Specifies the PowerExchange extraction map name used for


event processing.
See Configuring Event Table Processing on page 114..

CAPI Connection
Name Override

No

Real Time

Overrides the default CAPI connection name.


See Configuring the CAPI Connection Name Override on
page 115

Retrieve PWX Log


Entries

No

Both

Include all related PowerExchange log entries in the session log.

Chapter 4: Configuring Connections

Description

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 107 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Sybase Batch Mode Relational Connections


Configure relational database connections for Sybase to extract data and load data in batch
mode to Oracle sources and targets.
Table 4-12 describes the connection attributes you configure for Sybase relational database
connections:
Table 4-12. Sybase Batch Mode Relational Connection Attributes
Connection
Attribute

Required

Description

Name

Yes

Name of the relational database connection.

Code Page

Yes

Select the code page for the Integration Service to use to extract data from the
source database.
Note: In Unicode mode, PWXPC sets the code page with this value overriding any
code page specification in the PowerExchange configuration file.

Location

Yes

Location of the source or target database as specified as a node in the


PowerExchange configuration file dbmover.cfg.

Server Name

Yes

Name of the Sybase instance.

Database Name

Yes

Name of the database in the Sybase instance.

User Name

Yes

User name for the database being connected to.

Password

Yes

Password for the user name.

Environment SQL

No

SQL commands run in the database environment.

Compression

No

Select to compress source data during the PowerCenter session. See


Configuring Encryption and Compression on page 108.

Encryption Type

No

Select the encryption type.


See Configuring Encryption and Compression on page 108.

Encryption Level

No

Select the encryption level.


See Configuring Encryption and Compression on page 108.

Pacing Size

No

Enter the pacing size.


See Configuring Pacing on page 109.

Interpret as Rows

No

Specifies whether, or not, pacing size is in number of rows.


See Configuring Pacing on page 109.

Convert character
data to string

No

Convert embedded nulls in character fields to spaces.


See Converting Character Data to Strings on page 110.
Default is no.

Write Mode

No

Select the write mode. See Configuring Write Mode on page 111.
Default is Confirm Write On.

Sybase Batch Mode Relational Connections

107

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 108 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Configuring Connection Attributes


The connection attributes you configure depend on how you want to run the PowerCenter
session to extract data from the source. This is not the complete list of all attributes that can
be configured. The complete list of attributes for all connections is documented in preceding
sections of this chapter under the various connection types.
Some of the connection attributes that you can choose are:

Common connection attributes:

Encryption and compression

Pacing

Convert character data to string

Batch application and relational connection attributes:

Write Mode

Retrieve PWX log entries

CDC-specific connection attributes:

Image type

Event Table

CAPI Connection Name

Idle time

CDC Restart

UOW Count

Real-Time Flush Latency

Commit Threshold

Common Connection Attributes


The attributes discussed in this section are common to both the PWXPC relational and
application connection types.

Configuring Encryption and Compression


When you configure connections to extract and load data from PowerExchange, you can set
encryption and compression values to encrypt and compress data during the PowerCenter
session. See the PowerExchange Reference Manual for additional information.

108

Chapter 4: Configuring Connections

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 109 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Table 4-13 describes the compression and encryption attributes:


Table 4-13. Encryption and Compression Connection Attributes
Connection Attribute

Required

Description

Compression

No

Select to compress source data during the PowerCenter session.

Encryption Type

Yes

Select one of the following values for the encryption type:


- None
- RC2
- DES
Default is None.

Encryption Level

Yes

If you select None for Encryption Type, then PowerExchange ignores this
value.
If you select RC2 or DES for Encrypt, enter one of the following values for
the encryption level:
1 = 56-bit key encryption.
2 = For DES; Triple DES 164 bit key encryption. For RC2; 64 bit key
encryption.
3 = For DES; Triple DES 164 bit key encryption For RC2; 64 bit key
encryption.
Default is 1.

Configuring Pacing
You can configure the pacing size to slow the data transfer rate from the PowerExchange
Listener. The pacing size determines the amount of data the PowerExchange Listener passes
to the source or target. Configure the pacing size if an external application, database, or the
Integration Service node is a bottleneck during the session. For more information about
pacing size, see the PowerExchange Reference Manual.
Table 4-14 describes the pacing attributes:
Table 4-14. Pacing Size Connection Attributes
Connection Attribute

Required

Description

Pacing Size

No

Enter the amount of data the source system can pass to the
PowerExchange Listener. The lower the value, the faster the session
performance.
Minimum value is 0. Enter 0 for maximum performance.
Default is 0.

Interpret as Rows

No

Select to represent the pacing size in number of rows. If you clear this
option, the pacing size represents kilobytes.
This option is selected by default.

Configuring Connection Attributes

109

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 110 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Converting Character Data to Strings


Some data fields that are mapped as character fields actually contain non-character data in the
field; specifically a null or low value (x00). This usually occurs when a single field is usually
a collection of sub-fields. Nulls (x00) are used as delimiters between the sub-field values.
However, there is no explicit mapping of the sub-field other than in the application reading
the data.
When this data is extracted by PowerCenter, it is truncated when the first null indicator
(x00) is detected. So, the entire contents of the field cannot be extracted and then
manipulated in PowerCenter. For example, a character field contains the following
hexadecimal EBCDIC data:
C1C2C300C4C5C6C700C8C9

The application that processes this field uses the x00 as a delimiter and parses the field into
three strings:

xC1C2C3 (ABC)

xC4C5C6C7 (DEFG)

xC8C9 (HI)

If this field is read from PowerExchange by PowerCenter, the result be only the string ABC.
The rest of the field would be truncated when the first null indicator is detected in the data.
This connection attributes exists to allow these types of fields to be extracted. If selected,
embedded null indicators (x00) are converted to spaces (x40). As a result, the example
above would result in the field containing the following hexadecimal EBCDIC data:
C1C2C340C4C5C6C740C8C9

which when read by PowerCenter results in string ABC DEFG HI.


Table 4-15 describes the Convert character data to string attribute:
Table 4-15. Convert Character Data Connection Attribute
Connection Attribute

Required

Description

Convert character data to


string

No

Select to convert embedded nulls in character fields to spaces.


Default is to leave embedded nulls as-is.

Batch Application and Relational Connection Attributes


These attributes are available in both PWXPC batch application and relational connection
types unless otherwise noted.

110

Chapter 4: Configuring Connections

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 111 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Configuring Write Mode


Table 4-16 describes the Write Mode attributes:
Table 4-16. Write Mode Connection Attribute
Connection Attribute

Required

Description

Write Mode

No

Configure one of the following write modes:


- Confirm Write On. Sends data to the PowerExchange Listener and waits
for a success/no success response before sending more data. This is
important if good error recovery is a priority. It has the drawback of
slowing data transfer rates.
- Confirm Write Off. Sends data to the PowerExchange Listener without
waiting for a success/no success response (asynchronously). While
faster than Confirm Write On, only use this option when the target table
can be reloaded if an error occurs.
- Asynchronous with Fault Tolerance. Sends data to the PowerExchange
Listener asynchronously similar to Confirm Write Off but with the ability to
detect errors. This provides the speed of Confirm Write Off with the data
integrity of Confirm Write On.
Default is Confirm Write On.

Reject File

No

Overrides the default prefix of PWXR for the reject file.


PowerExchange creates the reject file on the target machine when the
Write Mode is Asynchronous with Fault Tolerance.
NOTE: Specifying PWXDISABLE will prevent creation of the reject files.
See the PowerExchange Reference Manual for further information.

There are three possible settings for Write Mode:

Confirm Write On

Confirm Write Off

Asynchronous with Fault Tolerance

Asynchronous with Fault Tolerance is only available for PWX DB2390, PWX DB2400, PWX
DB2UDB and PWX Oracle relational connections.
Confirm Write On ensures that data is sent synchronously to the PowerExchange Listener
(rather than buffered). After a SQL request is sent, the sender then waits for the response
from PowerExchange before the next SQL request is sent. This is important if good error
recovery is a priority. It has the drawback of slowing data transfer rates. In order to stop
session execution when errors are encountered, specify a value larger than 0 in the Session
Error handling option Stop on errors on the Config Object tab.
Confirm Write Off sends data asynchronously to the PowerExchange Listener by buffering
the data. While this method provides greater speed compared to Confirm Write On, it
removes the ability to determine exactly which SQL statement failed in error situations. As a
result, you must reload the entire table if an error occurs to ensure data integrity. Use this
setting only when loading tables.

Configuring Connection Attributes

111

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 112 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Note: The PowerCenter statistics are unreliable when using Confirm Write Off.

Asynchronous (write) with Fault Tolerance combines the speed of Confirm Write Off with
error detection of Confirm Write One. Data is buffered and sent asynchronously to the
PowerExchange Listener. A reject file is created on the target machine when SQL errors occur
allowing any errors to be corrected without reloading the entire table. You can also specify
how to handle specific SQL return codes. In order to stop session execution when errors are
encountered, specify a value larger than 0 in the Session Error handling option Stop on
errors on the Config Object tab. See the PowerExchange Reference Manual for a complete
description of Asynchronous Write with Fault Tolerance.

Retrieving PWX Log Entries


This attribute is specific to the PWXPC application connection types.
Table 4-17 describes the Retrieve PWX Log Entries attribute:
Table 4-17. Retrieve PWX Log Entries Connection Attribute
Connection Attribute

Required

Description

Retrieve PWX Log Entries

No

Include all related PowerExchange log entries in the session log.


Default is no PowerExchange messages in the session log.

Retrieving PowerExchange log entries will include into the PowerCenter session log messages
related to the session that are normally found only in the PowerExchange log. This allows a
single log to provide a view of both PowerCenter and PowerExchange processing, speeding
diagnosis when errors occur. The PowerExchange messages related to the session are returned
in the session log as a part of message PWXPC_10091.

CDC-Specific Connection Attributes


The attributes discussed in this section are specific to the PWXPC CDC application
connection types.
In order to properly configure CDC sessions, be sure to review the following information:

112

CDC-Specific Connection Attributes on page 112

Extracting CDC Data in Change and Real-time Modes on page 135

Understanding PWXPC Restart and Recovery on page 151

Enabling Session Recovery on page 165

Configuring CDC Sessions on page 166

Chapter 4: Configuring Connections

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 113 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Configuring Image Type


Table 4-18 describes the Image Type attribute:
Table 4-18. Image Type Connection Attribute
Connection Attribute

Required

Description

Image Type

No

Select one of the following types:


AI = Extract after images only.
BA = Extract before and after images.
Default is BA.

You can configure whether before-image data is extracted for update operations using the
Image Type specification. PowerExchange captures before and after image data for all
updates, regardless of source type. The before-image data can always be extracted in real-time
mode. In change mode, it is possible that only after-image data is available if the changes have
been specifically condensed with only after-images. See the appropriate PowerExchange
Adapter guide for the source type for additional information the change Condense process.If
you specify Image Type=BA, the before-image and after-image data of the entire row that was
updated are presented as two separate rows: a delete with the before-image data and an insert
with the after-image data.
If you specify Image Type=AI, then only after-image data is provided for update records
(unless you explicitly request before-image data). With AI processing, updates are passed as
update records and not changed to a delete/insert pair as occurs in BA processing.
It is possible, selectively by column, to request that before-image column data be embedded
within the after-image update record. When this form of before-image data is used, the
change remains an update (as opposed to being changed into a delete/insert pair). When you
use embedded before-image columns, you should specify AI for Image Type.
In order to request that the before-image of the column be embedded into the update row,
you must alter the PowerExchange extraction map. In the PowerExchange Navigator, select
the columns for which you would like before-image data. This will create before-image
columns (DTL__BI_columnname) within the extraction map for those columns selected. This
allows the before-image data to be easily manipulated in your mapping as it is contained in
the same update record as the after-image data.
One possible use for embedded before-image data is to handle update records where the
primary key has been updated. In some relational databases (such as DB2/390), it is possible
to do an update to the primary key (thereby changing the key value). The RDBMS
understands that this operation is equivalent to deleting the row and then re-adding it with a
new primary key. This activity is logged as an update and so will be passed as an update
record when extracted. In some circumstances this may causes problems when attempting to
apply this update to the target database as some relational databases does not allow primary
key values to be updated. Including the before-image data for key columns will allow this type
of activity to be detected. The Flexible Key Custom transformation will allow this to be
properly handled at the target.

Configuring Connection Attributes

113

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 114 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Note: To use the Flexible Key Custom transformation, you must configure before-image

columns in the PowerExchange extraction map. For more information about Flexible Key
Custom transformations, see Flexible Key Custom Transformation on page 177.
For additional information about configuring before-image columns, see the PowerExchange
Adapter guide for the source type.

Configuring Event Table Processing


Table 4-19 describes the Event Table attribute:
Table 4-19. Event Table Connection Attribute
Connection
Attribute

Required

Change
Real Time

Event Table

No

Real Time

Description
Specifies the PowerExchange extraction map name used for event
table processing.

By using an event table, you can stop real-time CDC sessions based on an external event. For
example, if you want to stop a CDC extraction nightly, after all of the days changes have been
processed, you can use an event table to make a change to that table at midnight. When
PowerExchange processes the change for the event table, it will stop reading changes at that
point and shut down the extraction.
To use event table processing, complete the following tasks:
1.

Register the event table for CDC.


The event table must be the same source type and on the same machine as the CDC data
being extracted. For example, if you are extracting DB2 changes from MVS, then the
event table must be a DB2 table in the same DB2 subsystem as the DB2 changes.

114

2.

Specify the extraction map name for the event table in the connection Event Table
attribute for the CDC sessions you wish to stop based on an event.

3.

When the event occurs, make a change to the event table.

4.

When PowerExchange reads the change to the event table, it places an end-of-file (EOF)
in the change stream.

5.

PWXPC processes the EOF, passes it along to the Integration Service and shuts down the
reader.

6.

The Integration Service completes writing all of the data currently in the pipeline and
ends the session.

Chapter 4: Configuring Connections

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 115 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Configuring the CAPI Connection Name Override


Table 4-20 describes the CAPI Connection Name Override attribute:
Table 4-20. CAPI Connection Override Connection Attribute
Connection
Attribute
CAPI Connection
Name Override

Required

Change
Real Time

Description

No

Real Time

Overrides the default CAPI connection name.

PowerExchange allows a maximum of eight CAPI_CONNECTION statements in the


PowerExchange DBMOVER configuration file. You use multiple CAPI_CONNECTION
statements to capture changes from more than one database type through a single
PowerExchange Listener on a single machine. For example, you can capture changes for
Oracle and UDB using a single PowerExchange Listener using multiple
CAPI_CONNECTION statements.
You can specify the default CAPI_CONNECTION statement by coding the
CAPI_SRC_DFLT statement in the PowerExchange configuration file. You request other
CAPI_CONNECTION statements by specifying the CAPI Connection Name Override
attribute.
See the PowerExchange Reference Manual for additional information about
CAPI_CONNECTION statements.

Configuring Idle Time


Idle Time is only applicable to Real-time connections.
Table 4-21 describes the Idle Time attribute:
Table 4-21. Idle Time Connection Attribute
Connection
Attribute

Required

Change
Real-time

Idle Time

No

Real Time

Description
Specifies the number of seconds the PowerExchange
Listener remains idle after reaching the end of the change
log (as indicated by message PWX-09967) before returning
an end-of-file (EOF).
If you enter:
-1 = EOF is never retuned; the session runs continuously.
0 = EOF is returned at the end of log; the session terminates
successfully.
n = EOF is returned after no data for n seconds; the session ends.
Default is -1.

Use the Idle Time terminating condition to indicate whether the real-time session should run
continuously (forever) or shutdown after a specified period of time. This parameter requires a
valid value and has a valid default value.
Configuring Connection Attributes

115

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 116 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

The Idle Time timing starts when the PowerExchange Listener begins reading changed data
for the source(s).
If -1 is entered for Idle Time, PowerExchange will never return an end-of-file (EOF) to the
Integration Server thereby causing the session to run forever. This is generally how a real-time
session is setup. It is the default value primed for Idle Time in all of the real-time
connections.
Continuous extraction sessions must be stopped using either the PowerExchange STOPTASK
command or through PowerCenter using Workflow Monitor Stop/Abort or the pmcmd
commands to stop and abort tasks and workflows.

If you stop the session or workflow using the PowerCenter Workflow Monitor or using
pmcmd, this is considered a normal termination. PowerCenter will perform a graceful
stop, instructing the CDC reader and the writers to shutdown and waiting until all data
currently in the pipeline is processed. For more information about stopping real-time
sessions and workflows, see the PowerCenterWorkflow Administration Guide.

If you abort the session or workflow using the PowerCenter Workflow Monitor or using
pmcmd, this is considered an abnormal termination since PowerCenter does not wait for
the reader and writer to shutdown or until all data in the pipeline is processed. For more
information about aborting sessions and workflows, see the PowerCenterWorkflow
Administration Guide.

The PowerExchange STOPTASK command will stop the extraction task in the
PowerExchange Listener and pass an EOF to the Integration Server which will terminate
the session successfully. For more information on the PowerExchange STOPTASK
command, see the Task Utility (DTLUTSK) documented in PowerExchange Utilities
Guide.

Warning: Ensure that you have switched the Session Properties Commit Type attribute to
Source and unchecked the Commit at End of File attribute. By default, Commit at End of
File is on and it will cause data to be committed after the CDC reader has shutdown and
committed the restart tokens. As a result, when the session is restarted, duplicate data will be
sent to the target.

If 0 is entered for Idle Time, PowerExchange will return an EOF to the Integration Service
when the end-of-log (EOL) is reached. After the EOF is received, the Integration Service will
terminate the session successfully, meaning that all data will be committed and the restart
token file will be updated. The end-of-log is determined by what was the current end of the
change stream at the point that PowerExchange started to read the change stream. This
concept of EOL is required because the change stream is generally not static so the actual
end-of -log is continually moving forward. PowerExchange issues the following message
when EOL is reached:
PWX-09967 CAPI i/f: End of log for time <yy/mm/dd> <hh:mm:ss> reached

For example, if a session starts reading a change stream at 10:00 a.m., the EOL at that point is
determined. After PowerExchange reaches that point in the change stream, it will return EOF
to the Integration Service. This means that changes recorded in the change stream after 10:00
a.m. will not be processed. Specifying 0 for Idle time is a useful in situations where you want
to extract changed data for sources periodically as opposed to continuously.
116

Chapter 4: Configuring Connections

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 117 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

If a positive number is specified for Idle Time, then the session will run until no data is
returned for the period of time specified. After Idle Time is reached, PowerExchange will
send an end-of-file (EOF) to the Integration Service and the session will terminate
successfully. Specifying a low Idle Time (1 for example) can result in this time being reached
before all available data in the change stream has been read.
The following message is issued to indicate that the Idle Time has been reached:
[PWXPC_10072] [INFO] [CDCDispatcher] session ended after waiting for
[idle_time] seconds. Idle Time limit is reached

This message is also issued when a continuous extraction is stopped using the PowerExchange
STOPTASK command. In this case, the idle_time variable in the message will show 86400
which is the never expire time limit used when an Idle Time of -1 is specified.
Tip: In highly active systems, a positive value for Idle Time may never match. Use 0 if you do

not want the session to run continuously.


For example, if you specify an Idle Time of 10 seconds and PowerExchange finds no data for
the source(s) in the change stream for a 10 second period, PowerExchange will return an EOF
to the Integration Service which will cause it to terminate successfully.
If you specify values for Reader Time Limit and Idle Time, the Integration Service stops
reading data from the source at the point based on whichever one of these terminating
conditions is reached first. So, if the Reader Time Limit is reached prior to the Idle Time
limit, the session will stop at that point regardless of the fact that Idle Time has not yet been
reached.
Warning: Reader Time Limit does not result in normal termination of a CDC session. Use Idle
Time instead of Reader Time Limit.

Configuring CDC Restart Attributes


Table 4-22 describes the restart attributes you must configure for CDC sessions:
Table 4-22. Change and Real-time Mode Restart Connection Attributes
Connection Attribute

Required

Description

Application Name

No

Application name for the extraction.


It is part of the audit trail for data extractions by the PowerExchange
Listener. The name must be unique for each session. The application
name is case sensitive and cannot exceed 20 characters.
Default is the first 20 characters of the workflow name.

Configuring Connection Attributes

117

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 118 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Table 4-22. Change and Real-time Mode Restart Connection Attributes


Connection Attribute

Required

Description

RestartToken File Folder

No

Folder name that contains the restart token override file on the Integration
Service node.
Default is $PMRootDir/Restart.

RestartToken File Name

No

File name in the Restart Token File Folder that contains the restart token
override file. PWXPC uses the contents of this file, if any, in conjunction
with the state information to determine the restart point for the session.
Default is the Application Name if specified or the workflow name if
Application Name is not specified.

All of these parameters require a valid value and all have valid default values.
There are numerous CDC reader application connection attributes that specify restart
information. PWXPC uses the restart information to tell PowerExchange from which point to
start reading the captured changed data.
Warning: Care must be taken when using the Application Name default as it may not result in
a unique name for the application name. It is imperative that the Application Name value and
the Restart Token File Name be unique for every session. Results are unpredictable and
include session failures and potential data loss if a non-unique name is used for either of these
attributes.

For more information about restart token files, see Configuring the Restart Token File on
page 162.

Configuring UOW Count


Table 4-23 describes the UOW Count attribute:
Table 4-23. UOW Count Connection Attribute
Connection
Attribute

Required

Change
Real-time

UOW Count

No

Both

Description
Specifies the number of units of work (UOWs) you want the
PWXPC to read from the source before flushing data to the target.
If you enter:
-1 = UOW count is not used
0 = UOW count is not used
n = n is the count of UOWs
Default is 1.

A unit of work (UOW) is a collection of changes within a single commit scope made by a
transaction on the source system. Each unit of work may consist of a different number of
changes. This parameter requires a valid value and has a valid default value.

118

Chapter 4: Configuring Connections

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 119 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

When the session runs, the PWXPC reader begins to read data from the PowerExchange
Listener. After data is provided to the source qualifier, the UOW Count begins. When you
use a non-zero value for the UOW Count session attribute, PWXPC issues a commit to the
target when it reaches the number of units of work specified in this terminating condition.
When the UOW Count is reached, a real-time flush will be triggered to flush the buffers so
that the changed data is committed to the target. The following message appears in the
session log to indicate that this has occurred:
[PWXPC_10081] [INFO] [CDCDispatcher] raising real-time flush with restart tokens
[restart1_token], [restart2_token] because UOW Count [uow_count] is reached

The commit to the target when reading CDC data is not strictly controlled by the UOW
Count specification. The Real-Time Flush Latency and the Commit Threshold values also
determine the commit frequency. To understand the affect that all of these values have on
commit processing, see Understanding Commit Processing with PWXPC on page 123.
For example, if the value for UOW Count is 10, the Integration Service commits all data read
from the source to its target after the 10th unit of work is processed (assuming the Real-Time
Flush Latency period has not expired first). The lower you set the value, the faster the
Integration Service commits data to the target. Therefore, if you require the lowest possible
latency for the apply of changes to the target, you should specify a UOW Count of 1.
Warning: When you specify a low UOW Count value, the session might consume more system
resources on the target platform. This is because it will commit to the target more frequently.
You need to balance performance and resource consumption with latency requirements when
choosing the UOW Count and Real-Time Flush Latency values.

Configuring Real-Time Flush Latency


Table 4-24 describes the Real-Time Flush Latency attribute:
Table 4-24. Real-Time Flush Latency Connection Attribute
Connection
Attribute
Real-Time
Flush Latency
in milli-seconds

Required

Change
Real-time

Description

No

Real Time

Value in milliseconds between buffer flushes.


If you enter:
0 to 2000 = PWXPC sets the value to 2000
n = The value specified for n is used if larger than 2000
Valid values are between 0 and 86400000 milliseconds.
Default is 0 (2000 milliseconds/2 seconds).

Use the Real-Time Flush Latency terminating condition to control the target commit latency
when running in real-time mode. PWXPC commits source data to the target at the end of the
specified maximum latency period. This parameter requires a valid value and has a valid
default value.

Configuring Connection Attributes

119

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 120 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

When the session runs, PWXPC begins to read data from the source. After data is provided to
the source qualifier, the Real-Time Flush Latency interval begins. At the end of each RealTime Flush Latency interval and an end-UOW boundary is reached, PWXPC issues a
commit to the target. The following message appears in the session log to indicate that this
has occurred:
[PWXPC_10082] [INFO] [CDCDispatcher] raising real-time flush with restart tokens
[restart1_token], [restart2_token] because Real-time Flush Latency [RTF_millisecs]
occurred

Only complete UOWs are committed during real-time flush processing.


The commit to the target when reading CDC data is not strictly controlled by the Real-Time
Flush Latency specification. The UOW Count and the Commit Threshold values also
determine the commit frequency. To understand the affect that all of these values have on
commit processing, see Understanding Commit Processing with PWXPC on page 123.
The value specified for Real-Time Flush Latency also controls the PowerExchange Consumer
API (CAPI) interface timeout value (PowerExchange latency) on the source platform. The
CAPI interface timeout value is displayed in the following PowerExchange message on the
source platform (and in the session log if Retrieve PWX Log Entries is specified in the
Connection Attributes):
PWX-09957 CAPI i/f: Read times out after <n> seconds

The CAPI interface timeout also affects latency as it will affect how quickly changes are
returned to the PWXPC reader by PowerExchange. PowerExchange will ensure that it returns
control back to PWXPC at least once every CAPI interface timeout period. This allows the
PWXPC to regain control and, if necessary, perform the real-time flush of data returned. A
high RTF Latency specification will also impact the speed with which stop requests from
PowerCenter are handled as the PWXPC CDC Reader must wait for PowerExchange to
return control before it can handle the stop request.
Tip: Use the PowerExchange STOPTASK command to shutdown more quickly when using a

high RTF Latency value.


For example, if the value for Real-Time Flush Latency is 10 seconds, PWXPC will issue a
commit for all data read after 10 seconds have elapsed and the next end-UOW boundary is
received. The lower you set the value, the faster the data commits data to the target.
Therefore, if you require the lowest possible latency for the apply of changes to the target, you
should specify a low Real-Time Flush Latency value.
Warning: When you specify a low Real-Time Flush Latency interval, the session might
consume more system resources on the source and target platforms. This is because:

The session will commit to the target more frequently therefore consuming more target
resources.

PowerExchange will return more frequently to the PWXPC reader thereby passing fewer
rows on each iteration and consuming more resources on the source PowerExchange
platform.

You need to balance performance and resource consumption with latency requirements when
choosing the UOW Count and Real-Time Flush Latency values.

120

Chapter 4: Configuring Connections

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 121 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Configuring Commit Threshold


Table 4-25 describes the Commit Threshold attribute:
Table 4-25. Commit Threshold Connection Attribute
Connection
Attribute
Commit
Threshold

Required

Change
Real-time

No

Real Time

Description
Enter the number of change records to process before a commit is
inserted into the change stream.
Note: This parameter puts a commit record into the change stream after
the specified number of records. The target commit is still controlled by
the UOW Count and Real-Time Flush Latency specification.
Default is 0.

Commit Threshold is only applicable to Real-Time CDC sessions. Use the Commit
Threshold terminating condition to cause commits before reaching the end of the UOW
when processing large UOWs. This parameter requires a valid value and has a valid default
value
Commit Threshold can be used to cause a commit before the end of a UOW is received, a
process also referred to as sub-packet commit. The value specified in the Commit Threshold
is the number of records within a source UOW to process before inserting a commit into the
change stream. This attribute is different from the UOW Count attribute in that it is a count
records within a UOW rather than complete UOWs. The Commit Threshold counter is reset
when either the number of records specified or the end of the UOW is reached.
This attribute is useful when there are extremely large UOWs in the change stream that might
cause locking issues on the target database or resource issues on the PowerCenter Integration
Server.
The Commit Threshold count is cumulative across all sources in the group. This means that
sub-packet commits are inserted into the change stream when the count specified is reached
regardless of the number of sources to which the changes actually apply. For example, a
UOW contains 900 changes for one source followed by 100 changes for a second source and
then 500 changes for the first source. If you set the Commit Threshold to 1000, the commit
record is inserted after the 1000th change record which is after the 100 changes for the second
source.
Warning: A UOW may contain changes for multiple source tables. Using Commit Threshold
can cause commits to be generated at points in the change stream where the relationship
between these tables is inconsistent. This may then result in target commit failures.

If 0 or no value is specified, commits will occur on UOW boundaries only. Otherwise, the
value specified is used to insert commit records into the change stream between UOW
boundaries, where applicable.
The value of this attribute overrides the value specified in the PowerExchange DBMOVER
configuration file parameter SUBCOMMIT_THRESHOLD. For more information on this
PowerExchange parameter, see the PowerExchange Reference Manual.
Configuring Connection Attributes

121

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 122 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

The commit to the target when reading CDC data is not strictly controlled by the Commit
Threshold specification. The commit records inserted into the change stream as a result of the
Commit Threshold value affect the UOW Count counter. The UOW Count and the RealTime Flush Latency values determine the target commit frequency.
For example, a UOW contains 1,000 change records (any combination of inserts, updates,
and deletes). If you specify 100 for Commit Threshold and 5 for UOW Count, then a
commit record will be inserted after each 100 records and a target commit will be issued after
every 500 records.
To understand the affect that all of these values have on commit processing, see
Understanding Commit Processing with PWXPC on page 123.

122

Chapter 4: Configuring Connections

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 123 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Understanding Commit Processing with PWXPC


The PowerExchange Client for PowerCenter (PWXPC), like all real-time readers, always uses
source-based commit. If the Commit Type in the Session Properties is set to Target,
Integration Service will automatically change it to source when the session is run. The
following message is issued in the session log to indicate that this has been done:
WRT_8226 Target Load Order Group [1] is set for real-time flushing. Target based commit is
switched to source based commit and target based commit interval is used as source based
commit interval.

Warning: Duplicate data on targets can occur if the Commit On End Of File option in the
Session Properties is enabled. To prevent this, change the Commit Type to Source and then
disable the Commit On End Of File option in the Session Properties. This will ensure that
PWXPC controls commit processing thereby ensuring the target data and restart tokens are
in-sync.

Source-based commit sessions have partitioning restrictions. For more information, see the
PowerCenterWorkflow Administration Guide.
There are three connection attributes which affect commit processing when running real-time
CDC sessions:

Commit Threshold

Real-Time Flush Latency

UOW Count

Note: When using PWXPC CDC Change connections, the only connection attribute that

affects commit processing is UOW Count.


With the exception of Commit Threshold, all source-based commits with PWXPC are done
on end-UOW boundaries. Commit Threshold exists to provide sub-packet commit
capability; that is, to commit data after a specified number of records within a single UOW.
If you specify values for UOW Count and Real-Time Flush Latency, then PWXPC issues
commits to the target when it reaches the UOW Count or when the Real-Time Flush Latency
period expires, whichever occurs first.When the commit is issued both the Real-Time Flush
(RTF) Latency period and the UOW Count counter are reset. PWXPC continues to read data
from the source until either the RTF Latency period matches or the UOW Count matches. At
which point, it issues another commit. This processing continues until the session terminates.
Commits inserted into the change stream as a result of the Commit Threshold specification
are counted in the UOW Count counter. Commit Threshold itself does not result in PWXPC
issuing a commit to the target. Only UOW Count and Real-Time Flush Latency will cause
that to happen.
A final commit is also done by PWXPC during reader termination to ensure that all buffered
and complete UOWs are committed.
Idle Time can impact the commit process by causing the real-time session to terminate. For
example, you set the Idle Time value to 10 seconds and the UOW Count to five units of
work. When the PWXPC reaches the UOW Count, it commits data to the target and

Understanding Commit Processing with PWXPC

123

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 124 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

continues to read data from the source. If the Idle Time is then reached, PowerExchange
stops reading from the source and sends an EOF to the Integration Service which terminates
the session. If only three complete UOWs have been read since the previous UOW countbased commit, these will be committed when the session terminates due to the final commit
done by PWXPC.
To illustrate the interaction of all of the values affecting commit processing, assume the
following settings:

Idle Time is -1 (never timeout)

Commit Threshold is 0 (no sub-packet commit)

RTF Latency is 5000 (5 seconds)

UOW Count is 1,000

The PWXPC reader receives 900 complete UOWs in five seconds after the first change row
enters the source qualifier. Because the RTF Latency value has matched, a source-based
commit is issued at this point. Both the UOW Count and RTF Latency period are then reset.
So, another commit will not be issued when the 1,000 UOW is read. The next 1,000 UOWs
are read in 4 seconds. So, a commit is issued after these 1,000 UOWs because the UOW
Count matched. Again, the RTF Latency period and the UOW Count are reset at this point.
More changed data is read and commits continue based on whichever attributes matches first.
So, in this example, commits were issued after the first 900 UOWs because RTF Latency
matched first and then again after the 1,900th UOW because the UOW Count then matched
first.
It is therefore possible to have both the Real-Time Flush Latency period and the UOW
Count control commits of the data. Commits will always be done on a UOW boundary based
(except when Commit Threshold is specified) on whichever attribute matches first.
For the lowest latency in getting changed data to the target, use an RTF Latency of 2000 (the
default) and a UOW Count of 1. This will cause a commit at each commit point in the source
data. Since the RTF Latency will only commit on a UOW boundary and a UOW Count of 1
causes a commit after each complete UOW is received, the effect is to have only UOW Count
control the commit process. Of course, this is the most-resource intensive setting from the
target DBMS perspective.
The RTF Latency specification controls:

The commit latency for the target tables

The PowerExchange Consumer API (CAPI) interface timeout value (PowerExchange


latency) on the source platform

In addition to impacting the target latency, high values for RTF Latency will impact the
speed with which stop requests from PowerCenter are handled. The PWXPC CDC Reader
must wait for PowerExchange to return control before it can handle the stop request.
Tip: Use the PowerExchange STOPTASK command to shutdown more quickly when using a

high RTF Latency value.


If you want to use less resources on the target system and want only UOW Count to control
the commit process, then ensure that Real-Time Flush Latency is set sufficiently high so as
124

Chapter 4: Configuring Connections

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 125 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

not to be a factor. The value necessary to do this is customer-dependent. The size of the
UOWs and the speed at which they are read will affect what value represents a high enough
RTF Latency period to eliminate it as a factor.

Understanding Commit Processing with PWXPC

125

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 126 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

126

Chapter 4: Configuring Connections

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 127 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Chapter 5

Working with Sessions

This chapter includes the following topics:

Overview, 128

Extracting Data in Batch Mode, 129

Extracting CDC Data in Change and Real-time Modes, 135

Loading Data to PowerExchange Targets, 142

127

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 128 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Overview
After you create mappings in the PowerCenter Designer, you can create a session and use the
session in a workflow to extract, transform, and load data. You create sessions and workflows
in the Workflow Manager.
You can create a session in a workflow to extract data in batch, change, or real-time mode.
You determine how you want the Integration Service to extract the data when you configure
the session. You can also create a session to load data to a target.
For more information about creating, configuring, and scheduling workflows, see the
PowerCenter Workflow Administration Guide.

Pipeline Partitioning
Pipeline partitioning cannot be used for sources in CDC sessions. You can use it for targets in
CDC sessions.
For more information about partitioning and a list of all partitioning restrictions, see the
PowerCenter Workflow Administration Guide.

Real-time Session Rules and Guidelines


For the list of limitations with real-time mode, see the Real-time Processing chapter of the
PowerCenter Workflow Administration Guide.

128

Chapter 5: Working with Sessions

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 129 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Extracting Data in Batch Mode


To extract data in batch mode, you must select a connection for batch mode and configure
session properties. The connection you select and the session properties you configure differ
depending on the type of source data.

Extracting Data from Multiple Files


You can extract data from multiple Sequential or VSAM ESDS files with the same record
layout using the File List Processing feature of PowerExchange. Use a file list file to provide
the names of the files from which you want to extract source data. The PowerExchange
Listener extracts data from the files listed in the file list file.
You can also override a Sequential or VSAM ESDS source and request File List Processing by
specifying the file list file name in the File List Name and ticking the Filelist File box in the
session properties. See Session Properties for Non-Relational Batch Mode Sessions on
page 129. See the PowerExchange Navigator User Guide for additional information about File
List Processing.

Constraint-Based Loading for Relational Targets


In the Workflow Manager, you can specify constraint-based loading for a session. When you
select this option, the Integration Service orders the target load on a row-by-row basis. For
every row generated by an active source, the Integration Service loads the corresponding
transformed row first to the primary key table, then to any foreign key tables.
For more information, see:

Constraint-Based Loading for Relational Targets on page 129.

PowerCenter Workflow Administration Guide.

Session Properties for Non-Relational Batch Mode Sessions


When you configure a session to extract data from a non-relational source in batch mode, you
can override data map information for the source. PWXPC and PowerExchange use this
information to extract the source data.
To configure a batch mode session for non-relational sources:
1.

In the Task Developer, double-click a session with a non-relational source to open the
session properties.

2.

Click the Sources view on the Mapping tab.

Extracting Data in Batch Mode

129

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 130 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

3.

In the Reader field of the Readers settings, the PowerExchange Batch Reader for the
specific source type will be shown. The Reader names for non-relational batch sources
have one of the following formats:
PowerExchange Batch Reader for <database_type>
PowerExchange Reader for <database_type>

The <database_type> is the one of the following:

ADABAS

ADABAS Unload Files

DB2 Datamaps

DB2 Unload Datasets

DATACOM

IDMS

IMS

Sequential Files

VSAM Files

The name of the reader cannot be altered. The only exception to this is Adabas where you
can choose between ADABAS and ADABAS Unload Files.
For example, a VSAM source looks as follows:
Figure 5-1. Session Mapping Tab - Batch VSAM Reader

130

Chapter 5: Working with Sessions

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 131 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

4.

In the Connection Value field, select the application connection from the available PWX
NRDB Batch connections.

5.

Click the Sources view on the Mapping tab.

6.

In the Properties settings, configure the following attributes (all fields are optional except
where noted):
Attribute Name

Source Type

Description

Schema Name Override

All

Overrides the source PowerExchange data map schema name.

Map Name Override

All

Overrides the source PowerExchange data map name.

File Name

ADABAS Unload

Specifies the file name of the unloaded Adabas database.


Required for ADABAS Unload.

ADABAS Password

ADABAS

Password for the ADABAS database.

Database Id Override

ADABAS,
ADABAS Unload

Overrides the ADABAS Database Id in the PowerExchange data


map.

File Id Override

ADABAS,
ADABAS Unload

Overrides the Adabas file id in the PowerExchange data map.

DB2 Sub System Id

DB2 Datamaps

Overrides the DB2 instance name in the PowerExchange data


map.

DB2 Table name

DB2 Datamaps

Overrides the DB2 Table name in PowerExchange data map.

Unload File Name

DB2 Unload
Datasets

Overrides the unload file name in PowerExchange data map.

Filter Overrides

All

Allows data to be filtered at the source by PowerExchange.


Enter a filter override using the following syntax:
<filter condition1>;<filter condition2>;...

- or <group name1>=<filter condition1>;<group


name2>=<filter condition2>;...

Use the <group name> syntax to limit the application of the filter
to a specific record.
If you do not specify <group name> and the source mapping is a
multi-record source, then the filter condition applies to all
records in the source mapping.
For example, you can select only records with ID column values
that contain DBA for a multi-record source with two records
called USER1 and USER by specifying either:
USER1=ID=DBA;USER2=ID=DBA

- or ID=DBA

See Filtering Source Data Using PWXPC on page 230.


IMS Unload File Name

IMS

IMS database unload file name. Required if you want to read


source data from the backup file instead of the IMS database.

Extracting Data in Batch Mode

131

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 132 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Attribute Name

Source Type

Description

File Name Override

VSAM, SEQ

Overrides the data set or file name in the PowerExchange data


map.
Enter enter the complete data set or file name. For the AS400,
this name should be: library_name/file_name.
If you selected the Filelist File check box, enter the filelist file
name in the File Name Override.

Filelist File

VSAM, SEQ

Select if the File Name Override field contains the data set name
of a list of files. Only select this option if you have entered a
filelist file for File Name Override.

SQL Query Override

All

Overrides the SQL query sent to PowerExchange, including any


Filter Overrides.

For information about other session properties, see the PowerCenter Workflow
Administration Guide.
7.

Click OK.

Session Properties for Relational Batch Mode Sessions


To extract data from a relational source in batch mode, select a PWXPC relational database
connection. You can then configure the session properties.
Session properties unique for PowerExchange are noted.
To configure a relational source batch mode session:

132

1.

In the Task Developer, double-click a session with a relational source to open the session
properties.

2.

Click the Sources view on the Mapping tab.

3.

In the Reader field of the Readers settings, select Relational Reader. For DB2 on z/OS,
you can also select PowerExchange Reader for DB2 Image Copy.

Chapter 5: Working with Sessions

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 133 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

For example, the available readers for a DB2 source looks as follows:
Figure 5-2. Session Mapping Tab - DB2 Readers

Note: The PowerExchange Reader for DB2 Image Copy is only applicable to DB2 for z/

OS sources. It cannot be used for DB2 sources on other platforms.


4.

In the Connection Value field, select PWX NRDB Batch application connection if using
the DB2 Image Copy reader.

Extracting Data in Batch Mode

133

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 134 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Select the appropriate PWX relational database connection if using the relational reader:

5.

PWX DB2390 for DB2 for z/OS

PWX DB2400 for DB2 for i5/OS

PWX DB2UDB for DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows

PWX Oracle for Oracle

PWX MSSQLServer for Microsoft SQL Server

PWX Sybase for Sybase

You can configure the following attributes for the PowerExchange Reader for DB2 Image
Copy:
Attribute Name

Description

Schema Name Override

Overrides the source schema name.

Map Name Override

Overrides the source table name.

DB2 Sub System Id

Overrides the DB2 instance name in the PowerExchange data map.

Image Copy Dataset

Provides the image copy data set name. If not specified, the most current
image copy data set is used.

Disable Consistency Checking

Overrides the unload file name in PowerExchange data map.

Filter Overrides

Allows data to be filtered at the source by PowerExchange. Enter a filter


override using the following syntax:
<filter condition1>;<filter condition2>;...

For example, you can select only records with ID column values that contain
DBA by specifying:
ID=DBA

See Filtering Source Data Using PWXPC on page 230.


SQL Query Override

Overrides the SQL query sent to PowerExchange, including any filter


overrides.

For information about other session properties, see the PowerCenter Workflow
Administration Guide.
6.

134

Click OK.

Chapter 5: Working with Sessions

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 135 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Extracting CDC Data in Change and Real-time Modes


To extract change capture data in change mode (CAPX), you select a change mode
application connection. To extract data in real-time mode (CAPXRT), you select a real-time
mode application connection.
Note: For compatibility purposes, non-relational source definitions imported in PowerCenter

7.x can still select either Batch or CDC readers and application connections. Non-relational
source definitions imported in PowerCenter 8.x automatically have the appropriate Batch
Reader selected for the source type. This reader selection cannot be changed.
In order to properly configure CDC sessions, review the following topics:

CDC-Specific Connection Attributes on page 112

Understanding Commit Processing with PWXPC on page 123

Extracting CDC Data in Change and Real-time Modes on page 135

Understanding PWXPC Restart and Recovery on page 151

Configuring the Restart Token File on page 162

Enabling Session Recovery on page 165

Configuring CDC Sessions on page 166

PowerExchange Extraction Maps


The metadata that is used for sessions with Change Data Capture (CDC) sources is taken
from the PowerExchange extraction maps. Extraction maps are created by the PowerExchange
Navigator when the source is initially registered for Change Data Capture. These can be
manually modified at a later date. You can also create new extraction maps using an existing
capture registration.
When importing source definitions with PowerCenter Designer, you can specify the CDC
Datamaps option (requesting extraction maps) in the Import from PowerExchange dialog
box. Source definitions created from extraction maps contain the extraction map schema and
map name in the Metadata Extensions. This eliminates the need to specify the extraction map
name in the session properties.
Source definitions created from relational database metadata require that you specify the
extraction map name in the Session Properties if you want to use a CDC reader and
application connection. Source definitions created in PowerCenter V8.x using the Import
from PowerExchange dialog box with the CDC Datamap option ticked do not require the
specification of the extraction map name. Import CDC sources using the CDC Datamaps
option to minimize the customization required both in Designer and Workflow Manager.
Note: With non-relational sources imported in PowerCenter V8.x or later, extraction maps are

the only choice if you want to use a CDC reader. It is no longer possible to select a CDC
reader with sources created from PowerExchange data maps in PowerCenter V8.x (that is,
sources with Database Type of PWX_source_NRDB2).

Extracting CDC Data in Change and Real-time Modes

135

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 136 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

If you want to extract change data from a multi-record non-relational source using extraction
maps, you must create a PowerExchange capture registration for every table in the data map.
This creates an extraction map for each table. You can then either import the data map as a
multi-record non-relational source (for batch usage) or import the extraction maps for each
table (for CDC usage).

Extracting CDC Data from Multiple Sources in a Session


If the mapping contains multiple sources from which you want to extract CDC data in
change mode or real-time mode, all sources must use the same application connection. You
need only specify the application connection on the first source in the mapping. All other
connections can have a Type of None.
Note: All of the sources must be the same source data type. Sessions with mappings that

include sources with multiple data types will fail when executed.

Constraint-Based Loading for Relational Targets


In the Workflow Manager, you can specify constraint-based loading for a session. When you
select this option, the Integration Service orders the target load on a row-by-row basis. For
every row generated by an active source, the Integration Service loads the corresponding
transformed row first to the primary key table, then to any foreign key tables.
The constraint-based loading session attribute, Constraint based load ordering, only applies
to insert operations. With changed data, there will usually be a mixture of inserts, updates,
and deletes. In order to obtain complete constraint-based loading, you must also set Custom
Property FullCBLOSupport=Yes. This causes changed data to be loaded to targets in the same
Transaction Control Unit (TCU) using the Row Id assigned to the data by the CDC Reader.
As a result, data is applied to the targets in the same order in which it was applied to the
sources. The following message will be issued in the session log to indicate that this support is
enabled:
WRT_8417 Complete Constraint-Based Load Ordering is enabled.

The Custom Property can be set in the session Config Object tab in the Custom Properties
attribute. This property can also be set in the Integration Service making it applicable to all
workflows and sessions that use that Integration Service. See Knowledge Base Article #18015
for information about how to set Custom Properties in the Integration Service.
If you are using full constraint-based loading, then your mapping must not contain active
transformations which change the Row Id generated by the CDC Readers. The
transformations that change the Row Id are: Aggregator, Custom (configured as active),
Joiner, Normalizer, Rank, and Sorter transformations. All other transformations can be used.
For more real-time mode limitations, see the PowerCenter Workflow Administration Guide.
For more information about constraint-based loading, see the PowerCenter Workflow
Administration Guide.

136

Chapter 5: Working with Sessions

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 137 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Session Properties for Change and Real-Time Mode Sessions


When you configure a session to extract data in change or real-time mode, PWXPC uses the
extraction map to extract the source data. Source definitions for CDC sources can be created
using extraction maps (CDC Datamaps in the Import dialog box) or by importing metadata
from the relational database. The session properties will differ based upon how the source
metadata was imported.
Configuring a change or real-time mode sessions (extraction map sources):
1.

In the Task Developer, double-click the session to edit it.

2.

Click the Properties tab and change the following:

Commit Type field - Change to Source.

Commit on End of File field - Clear this field to turn this off.

Figure 5-3. Session Properties Tab

To enable recovery for the session, change the Recovery Strategy attribute to Resume from
last checkpoint. Enabling recovery for CDC sessions is important to ensure that data and
restart tokens are properly handled. For more information, see Restart and Recovery on
page 149.
3.

Click the Sources view on the Mapping tab.


For relational sources, you will have to choose the desired CDC Reader (see page 139).
With extraction map sources, the reader is automatically chosen based on the source type

Extracting CDC Data in Change and Real-time Modes

137

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 138 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

of the extraction map. In this example, the extraction map used in the mapping is for a
DB2/390 source so the PowerExchange CDC Reader for DB2/390 is chosen:
Figure 5-4. Session Mapping Tab - Extraction Map Source

In the Connection Value field, select CDC Real Time or CDC Change application
connection types. PWXPC displays the valid connections for the source type in the
Application Connection Browser.

138

4.

Optionally, open the application connection to override any connection values. See
Configuring Connections on page 79.

5.

In the Session Properties settings, configure the following optional attributes:


Attribute Name

Source Type

Description

Schema Name
Override

All

Overrides the source PowerExchange extraction map schema


name.

Map Name Override

All

Overrides the source PowerExchange extraction map name.

Database Id Override

ADABAS

Overrides the ADABAS Database Id in the PowerExchange data


map.

File Id Override

ADABAS

Overrides the Adabas file id in the PowerExchange data map.

Chapter 5: Working with Sessions

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 139 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Attribute Name

Source Type

Description

Library/File Override

DB2400

Overrides the library and file name in the extraction map.


Specify complete library and file names in the format:
library/file
This attribute overrides the Library/File Override value on the
application connection.
Warning: Do not specify an asterisk for library name if using
PWXPC restart.

Source Schema
Override
Filter Overrides

Oracle

Overrides the source schema name.


Allows data to be filtered at the source by PowerExchange.
Enter a filter override using the following syntax:
<filter condition1>;<filter condition2>;...

For example, you can ask PowerExchange to filter change


records so that only ones where columns ID and ACCOUNT
have changed are passed by specifying:
DTL__CI_ID=Y;DTL__CI_ACCOUNT=Y

See Filtering Source Data Using PWXPC on page 230.


SQL Query Override

Overrides the SQL query sent to PowerExchange, including any


Filter Overrides.

For information about other properties settings, see the PowerCenter Workflow
Administration Guide.
To configure a change or real-time mode session (relational sources):
1.

In the Task Developer, double-click the session to edit it.

2.

Click the Properties tab and change the following:

Commit Type field - Change to Source.

Commit on End of File field - Clear this field to turn this off.

See Figure 5-3 on page 137 for an example of the Properties tab.
To enable recovery for the session, change the Recovery Strategy attribute to Resume from
last checkpoint. Enabling recovery for CDC sessions is important to ensure that data and
restart tokens are properly handled. For more information, see Restart and Recovery on
page 149.

Extracting CDC Data in Change and Real-time Modes

139

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 140 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

3.

Click the Sources view on the Mapping tab.


Figure 5-5. Session Mapping Tab - Relational Source

In the Reader field of the Readers settings, select a CDC Reader from those available
based on the source type:

4.

DB2390: PowerExchange CDC Change or PowerExchange CDC Real-time

DB2400: PowerExchange CDC Change or PowerExchange CDC Real-time

DB2UDB: PowerExchange Real-time

Oracle: PowerExchange CDC Change or PowerExchange CDC Real-time

MSSQL: PowerExchange Real-time

In the Connection Value field, select an application connection.


Tip: For CDC Change and Real-time Readers, only choose an application connection for

the first CDC source. For subsequent CDC sources, choose a Connection Type of None.
PowerExchange group source processing only uses the information on the first
application connection. Subsequent application connection specifications are not
required and may cause session failures.
5.

140

Optionally, open the application connection to override any connection values. See
Configuring Connections on page 79.

Chapter 5: Working with Sessions

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 141 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

6.

In the Properties settings, configure the following attributes. All fields are optional except
where noted:
Attribute Name

Source Type

Description

Extraction Map Name

All

The PowerExchange extraction map name for the CDC source.


Required if using a CDC Change or Real Time Reader.
You must specify the extraction map name for the relational
source.

Library/File Override

DB2400 Real Time

Overrides the library and file name in the extraction map.


Specify complete library and file names in the format:
library/file
This attribute overrides the Library/File Override value on the
application connection.
Warning: Do not specify an asterisk for library name if using
PWXPC restart.

Source Schema
Override

Oracle Change and


Real Time

Overrides the source schema name.

For information about other properties settings, see the PowerCenter Workflow
Administration Guide.
7.

Click OK.

Extracting CDC Data in Change and Real-time Modes

141

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 142 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Loading Data to PowerExchange Targets


You can load data to relational targets as well as to non-relational targets. See Table 1-2 on
page 5 for the list of relational and non-relational targets for which PowerExchange provides
write support.

Loading Data to Relational Targets


To load data to a relational target, select a relational database connection. You can then
configure properties for session as you would any other relational target.
Note: DB2 for i5/OS (DB2/400) tables can also be accessed as flat files. If the table has been

imported into PowerExchange as a sequential data map, you can use a PWX NRDB Batch
application connection to write to it.
Configuring sessions to load data to relational targets:

142

1.

In the Task Developer, double-click the session to edit it.

2.

Click the Targets view on the Mapping tab.

3.

In the writers setting, select relational writer to run sessions with relational targets.

Chapter 5: Working with Sessions

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 143 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

The following example shows a DB2/390 target:


Figure 5-6. Session Mapping Tab - Relational Targets

4.

In the Connections Value field, select a relational database connection from one of the
following types:

PWX DB2390 for DB2 for z/OS

PWX DB2400 for DB2 for i5/OS

PWX DB2UDB for DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows

PWX Oracle for Oracle

PWX MSSQLServer for Microsoft SQL Server

PWX Sybase for Sybase

5.

Configure any other session properties.

6.

Click OK.

For information about properties settings, see the PowerCenter Workflow Administration
Guide.

Loading Data to PowerExchange Targets

143

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 144 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Loading Data to Non-Relational Targets


PWXPC allows you to load data to the following non-relational targets:

Adabas

IMS

Sequential, including flat files on AS/400, Linux, UNIX, and Windows

VSAM

The writer is set to the correct PowerExchange Writer based on the target type. You must
select a PWX NRDB Batch application connection. You can then configure properties for
session as you would any other target.
To configure sessions to load data to non-relational targets:
1.

In the Task Developer, double-click the session to edit it.

2.

Click the Targets view on the Mapping tab.


The writer value is set based on the target type.

144

Chapter 5: Working with Sessions

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 145 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

The following example shows a sequential target:


Figure 5-7. Session Mapping Tab - Non-Relational Targets

3.

In the Connections Value field, select a PWX NRDB Batch application connection.

4.

In the Properties settings, configure the PWXPC session properties. See Table 5-1 on
page 146.

5.

Configure any other session properties.

6.

Click OK.

For information about other Properties settings, see the PowerCenter Workflow
Administration Guide.

Loading Data to PowerExchange Targets

145

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 146 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Session Properties for Non-Relational Targets


PowerExchange and PWXPC support a variety of non-relational targets. See Table 1-2 on
page 5 for the complete list. The following table contains the optional Session Properties for
all PWXPC non-relational targets, in alphabetical order:
Table 5-1. Session Properties for Non-Relational Targets
Attribute Name

Source Type

Description

ADABAS Password

ADABAS

Adabas file password.

BLKSIZE

SEQ (MVS only)

MVS data set block size.


Default is 0 (best possible block size).

DATACLAS

SEQ (MVS only)

MVS SMS data class name.

Delete SQL Override

ADABAS, IMS, VSAM

Overrides default Delete SQL sent to PowerExchange.

Disp

SEQ (MVS only)

MVS data set disposition. Values are: OLD, SHR, NEW, MOD.
Default is MOD if the data set exists and NEW if it does not.

File Name Override

SEQ, VSAM

Overrides the data set or file name in the PowerExchange data


map. Enter enter the complete data set or file name.
For AS/400, this name should be: library_name/file_name.

146

Insert Only

ADABAS, IMS, VSAM

Processes updates and deletes as inserts.

Insert SQL Override

All

Overrides the default Insert SQL sent to PowerExchange.

LRECL

SEQ (MVS only)

MVS data set logical record length.


Default is 256.

Map Name Override

All

Overrides the target PowerExchange data map name.

MGMTCLAS

SEQ (MVS only)

SMS management class name.

MODELDSCB

SEQ (MVS only)

MVS Model DSCB for non-SMS-managed GDG data sets.

Post SQL

All

SQL statement(s) executed after the session is run using the target
database connection.

Pre SQL

All

SQL statement(s) executed before the session is run using the


target database connection.

Primary Space

SEQ (MVS only)

MVS Primary space allocation, in the units specified in Space.


Default is 1.

RECFM

SEQ (MVS only)

MVS Record format. Values are: F, V, FU, FB, VU, VB, FBA, VBA.

Schema Name
Override

All

Overrides the target PowerExchange data map schema name.

Secondary Space

SEQ (MVS only)

MVS Secondary space allocations, in the units specified in Space.


Default is 1.

Space

SEQ (MVS only)

MVS data set space units. Values are:


- CYLINDER
- TRACK
Default is TRACK.

Chapter 5: Working with Sessions

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 147 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Table 5-1. Session Properties for Non-Relational Targets


Attribute Name

Source Type

Description

STORCLAS

SEQ (MVS only)

SMS storage class name.

Truncate Table
Option

IMS, VSAM

Truncates table (deletes contents) before loading new data.


Note: VSAM data sets must be defined with the REUSE option for
truncate to function correctly.

UNIT

SEQ (MVS only)

MVS unit type.


Default is SYSDA.

Update SQL Override

ADABAS, IMS, VSAM

Overrides the default Update SQL that is sent to PowerExchange.

Upsert

ADABAS, IMS, VSAM

Processes failed inserts as updates and updates as inserts.

VOLSER

SEQ (MVS only)

MVS volume serial number.

Loading Data to PowerExchange Targets

147

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 148 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

148

Chapter 5: Working with Sessions

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 149 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Chapter 6

Restart and Recovery

This chapter includes the following topics:

Overview, 150

Understanding PWXPC Restart and Recovery, 151

Creating Recovery Tables, 160

Configuring the Restart Token File, 162

PWXPC Restart and Recovery Operation, 165

149

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 150 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Overview
This chapter describes PWXPC restart and recovery processing as well as how to configure
your CDC sessions to use this processing.
Each source in a CDC session has unique restart information, also referred to as restart
tokens. PWXPC manages the CDC restart information. The Integration Service provides
recovery for the target files and tables in CDC sessions.
In order to extract change data from the change stream, PWXPC provides restart information
for the CDC sources to PowerExchange. PowerExchange reads the change stream on the
CDC source platform and provides complete units of work to PWXPC. A unit of work
(UOW) is a collection of changes within a single commit scope made by a transaction on the
source system. Using the commit interval information specified in the CDC session
connection, PWXPC periodically flushes complete UOWs to the Integration Service.
Target recovery and restart information is stored as the target tables and files are updated by
the Integration Service. The Integration Service and PWXPC use this information to recover
and restart stopped or failed sessions from the point of interruption.
In order to properly configure CDC sessions, review the following topics:

CDC-Specific Connection Attributes on page 112

Understanding Commit Processing with PWXPC on page 123

Extracting CDC Data in Change and Real-time Modes on page 135

Understanding PWXPC Restart and Recovery on page 151

Configuring the Restart Token File on page 162

Enabling Session Recovery on page 165

Configuring CDC Sessions on page 166

In order to manage CDC sessions, review PWXPC Restart and Recovery Operation on
page 165.

150

Chapter 6: Restart and Recovery

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 151 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Understanding PWXPC Restart and Recovery


Session Recovery
PowerCenter and PWXPC restart and recovery functionality are utilized when you configure
the Recovery Strategy Resume from the last checkpoint. Enabling a resume recovery strategy
ensures that both the target data and CDC restart information can be recovered in the event
of session failure.
Warning: Do not enable recovery processing if any of the targets in the CDC session use the
File Writer to write CDC data to flat files. The restart tokens for all targets in the session,
including relational targets, will be compromised if there is a flat file target in the same
session. Data loss or duplication may occur.

When you enable a resume recovery strategy, the Integration Service provides recovery for the
target tables and files and PWXPC provides recovery for the CDC restart information.
PWXPC issues the following message indicating that recovery is in effect:
PWXPC_12094 [INFO] [CDCRestart] Advanced GMD recovery in affect. Recovery is automatic

The Integration Service stores the session state of operation in the shared location,
$PMStorageDir. The Integration Service saves relational target recovery in the target
database.
CDC restart information, also called restart tokens, originates from PowerExchange on the
CDC source platform. PWXPC stores CDC restart information in different locations based
upon the target type:

For non-relational targets, PWXPC stores the CDC restart information in the shared
location, $PMStorageDir, in state files on the Integration Service platform.

For relational targets, PWXPC stores the CDC restart information in state tables in the
target database.

When the Integration Service performs recovery, it restores the state of operation to recover
the session from the point of interruption. It uses the target recovery data to determine how
to recover the target tables. PWXPC and PowerExchange use the CDC restart information to
determine the correct point in the change stream from which to restart the extraction.

Recovery Tables
For relational targets, the Integration Service creates the following recovery tables in the
target database:

PM_RECOVERY. This table contains target load information for the session run. The
Integration Service removes the information from this table after each successful session
and initializes the information at the beginning of subsequent sessions.

PM_TGT_RUN_ID. This table contains information the Integration Service uses to


identify each target on the database. The information remains in the table between session
runs. If you manually create this table, you must create a row and enter a value other than
zero for LAST_TGT_RUN_ID to ensure that the session recovers successfully.
Understanding PWXPC Restart and Recovery

151

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 152 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

PM_REC_STATE. This table contains restart information for CDC sessions. The restart
information recorded in the table contains the application name and restart tokens for the
session. The restart information remains in the table permanently. The Integration Service
updates it with each commit to the target tables.

If you edit or drop the recovery tables before you recover a session, the Integration Service
cannot recover the session. If you disable recovery, the Integration Service does not remove
the recovery tables from the target database. You must manually remove the recovery tables.
If you want the Integration Service to create the recovery tables, grant table creation privilege
to the database user name for the target database connection. For the database user name used
with PowerExchange relational targets, see Recovery Table Creation with PowerExchange
Targets on page 160.
If you do not want the Integration Service to create the recovery tables, create the recovery
tables manually.
Tip: If you are using PowerExchange relational target connections, manually create these

tables so you can assign the desired database attributes. See Creating the Recovery Tables
Manually on page 161.
For more information about the PM_RECOVERY and PM_TGT_RUN_ID tables, see the
PowerCenterWorkflow Administration Guide.

Recovery State Table


The recovery state table contains the state and CDC restart information for a CDC session.
The table resides in the same target database as target tables. The Integration Service creates
the state table automatically if it does not exist. See Creating Recovery Tables on page 160.
The Integration Service creates an entry in the state table for each CDC session. These entries
may comprise more than one row. CDC sessions with heterogeneous relational target tables
have entries in the state table in each unique target database. For example, a CDC session
which targets Oracle and UDB tables has an entry in the state table in the target Oracle
database and in the target UDB database.
Each session entry in the state table contains a number of repository identifiers as well as
execution state data like the checkpoint number and the CDC restart information. The
columns in the state table are:

152

OWNER_TYPE_ID - PowerCenter-defined identifier

REP_GID - Global unique identifier of the repository

FOLDER_ID - Folder identifier

WFLOW_ID - Workflow identifier to which the session belongs

WFLOW_RUN_INST_NAME - Workflow run instance name

WLET_ID - Worklet identifier

TASK_INST_ID - Session (task) instance identifier

WID_INST_ID - Reader widget instance identifier

Chapter 6: Restart and Recovery

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 153 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

GROUP_ID - Partition group Identifier

PART_ID - Partition identifier

PLUGIN_ID - Application connection plug-in subtype identifier

APPL_ID - Application name from the source application connection

SEQ_NUM - Entry sequence number

VERSION - Session version number

CHKPT_NUM - Session checkpoint number

STATE_DATA - Restart state data for the session

The following columns contain PWXPC-specific restart information:

The APPL_ID column contains the application name specified in the source application
connection.

The STATE_DATA column, which contains the restart tokens for the session, is a variable
1024 byte binary column. If the number of restart tokens for a session causes the data to
exceed 1024 in length, additional rows are added to accommodate the remainder of the
restart information. The SEQ_NUM field is increased by one, starting from zero, for each
additional row added for a session entry.

The majority of the columns in the table are task and workflow repository attributes. These
repository attributes remain static unless the task or workflow is altered. The following
examples are actions that alter these repository attributes:

Adding or removing sources or targets from the mapping used by the session

Moving the workflow or session to a different folder

Moving the session to a different workflow

See Changing CDC Sessions on page 171 for additional information.


During session initialization, the Integration Service reads the state table looking for an entry
that matches the session data. All column data (with the exception of VERSION,
CHKPT_NUM, and STATE_DATA) must match the task and workflow repository
attributes for the Integration Service to use an entry. If a match is found, the Integration
Service uses that entry for target recovery processing. PWXPC uses the CDC restart
information stored in the STATE_DATA column to perform restart and recovery processing.

Recovery State File


The recovery state file is similar to the state table. PWXPC uses the state file to store the
CDC restart information for non-relational target files. Non-relational target files include
MQ Series message queues, PowerExchange non-relational targets, and other PowerCenter
non-relational targets. The Integration Service automatically creates the recovery state file in
the shared location, $PMStorageDir, if it does not exist. The file name for the recovery state
file is prefixed with:
pm_rec_state_<application_name>

Understanding PWXPC Restart and Recovery

153

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 154 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

The Integration Service uses the application name from the source CDC connection for the
application name value in the state file name prefix. The Integration Service includes the
complete file name in message CMN_65003. The remainder of the fields in the file name are
task and workflow repository attributes. These repository attributes remain static unless the
task or workflow is altered. The following examples are actions that alter these repository
attributes:

Adding or removing sources or targets from the mapping used by the session

Moving the workflow or session to a different folder

Moving the session to a different workflow

See Changing CDC Sessions on page 171 for additional information.

The Restart Token File


PWXPC stores the restart tokens in the state table in the target database for relational targets
and in the state file on the Integration Service platform for non-relational targets. The restart
token file provides:

Initial restart tokens for new CDC sessions

Overrides for the restart tokens in the state table or file for existing CDC sessions

PWXPC uses the restart token file in the folder specified in the RestartToken File Folder
attribute of the source CDC connection. PWXPC automatically creates this folder, if it does
not exist, when the attribute contains the default value of $PMRootDir/Restart. PWXPC does
not automatically create any other restart token folder name.
During session initialization, PWXPC:

Uses the name specified in the RestartToken File Name attribute to create an empty restart
token file, if one does not already exist.

Creates a merged view of the restart tokens by reconciling the restart tokens specified in
the restart token file with those in state tables and the state file for all relational and nonrelations targets, respectively.
For more information on the reconciliation process, see Determining the Restart Point
on page 155.

Places the results of the restart token reconciliation process into an initialization file in the
restart token file directory and empties out the restart token file.
Emptying the restart token file ensures that it does not override the state table or state file
restart tokens with the same restart information the next time the session is run.

During normal termination, PWXPC writes the ending restart tokens into a termination file
in the restart token file directory. The restart token files containing the initialization and
termination restart tokens have the following names:
<restart_token_file_name>yyyymmddhhmmss_init
<restart_token_file_name>yyyymmddhhmmss_term

154

Chapter 6: Restart and Recovery

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 155 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Where:

restart_token_file_name is the restart token file name from the CDC connection

yyyymmddhhmmss is the initialization file creation timestamp

init or term is for initialization and termination files, respectively

For example, a CDC source application connection specifies a restart token file name of
my.app.txt, which does not exist. PWXPC creates the following files on the Integration
Service platform in the restart token file folder specified in the connection:

my.app.txt

my.app.txtyyyymmddhhmmss_init

my.app.txtyyyymmddhhmmss_term

The restart token file, my.app.txt, is empty. The timestamps on both the initialization and
termination files are the same to indicate that they are related to the same run. The
termination file may not exist or may be empty if the session fails.
If you are using the default value of zero for the connection attribute Number of Runs to Keep
RestartToken File, PWXPC keeps only one copy of the paired initialization and termination
files. Otherwise, PWXPC uses the value specified in that attribute to determine the number
of backup copies of these paired files to keep. During termination, PWXPC removes any
additional pairs of the backup files beyond the Number of Runs to Keep RestartToken File
value.

Determining the Restart Point


Start CDC sessions in one of the following ways:

Cold start. When you cold start a CDC session, PWXPC reads only the restart token file
to acquire restart tokens for all sources and makes no attempt to recover the session. The
session continues to run until stopped or interrupted.

Warm Start. When you warm start a CDC session, PWXPC reconciles the restart tokens
provided in the restart token file, if any, with any restart tokens that exist in the state file
or state tables. If necessary, PWXPC performs recovery processing. The session continues
to run until stopped or interrupted.

Recover. When you recover a CDC session, PWXPC reads the restart tokens from the
state file and state tables and writes them into the restart token file. If necessary, PWXPC
performs recovery processing. After PWXPC finishes updating the restart token file and
doing any necessary recovery, the session ends.

See Starting CDC Sessions on page 169 for more details.


Each CDC source in the CDC session has its own unique restart point. You should create and
populate the restart token file with restart points for each source prior to running a CDC
session for the first time. If you do not provide restart tokens in the restart token file and no
existing entry exists for the session in the state tables or the state file, then PWXPC passes null
restart tokens to PowerExchange for all sources in the session. See Default Restart Points on
page 157 for further information about null restart tokens.

Understanding PWXPC Restart and Recovery

155

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 156 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

The restart tokens PWXPC uses varies based on whether you warm or cold start the CDC
session and whether you provide any overriding restart tokens in the restart token file.

Cold Start Processing


Cold start workflows and sessions using the cold start command from Workflow Manager,
Workflow Monitor, or pmcmd. PWXPC uses the restart tokens provided in the restart token
file, disregarding the state file and state tables, as follows:

Restart Token file empty or does not exist. PWXPC assigns null restart tokens to all
sources in the session. See Default Restart Points on page 157 for further information
about null restart tokens.

Restart token file contains explicit override statements. PWXPC assigns the restart tokens
supplied in the restart token file to the specified sources. PWXPC assigns the oldest restart
point of the restart tokens specified to all remaining sources. See Configuring the Restart
Token File on page 162 for further information about explicit override statements.

Restart token file contains special override statement. PWXPC assigns the restart tokens
supplied in the restart token file to all sources. See Configuring the Restart Token File
on page 162 for further information about the special override statement.

Restart token file contains special override statement and explicit override statements.
PWXPC assigns the restart tokens supplied in the restart token file in the explicit override
statements to the specified sources. PWXPC assigns the restart tokens supplied in the
special override statement to all remaining sources.

Warm Start Processing


Warm start workflows and sessions using the start or restart commands from Workflow
Manager, Workflow Monitor, or pmcmd. PWXPC merges the restart tokens provided in the
restart token file with any restart information that exists in the state file and the state tables as
follows:

Restart token file empty or does not exist.

If no state file (non-relational target) or no entry in a state table (relational target) for
the session:
PWXPC assigns null restart tokens to all sources in the session. See Default Restart
Points on page 157 for further information about null restart tokens.

If state file (non-relational target) or entry in a state table (relational target) exists for
some but not all sources in the session:
PWXPC assigns the restart tokens found in the state file or state tables to the
appropriate sources. PWXPC assigns the oldest restart point of the restart tokens
available to all remaining source without restart tokens.

If state file (non-relational target) or entry in a state table (relational target) exists for all
sources in the session:
PWXPC uses the restart tokens from the state file or state tables.

156

Chapter 6: Restart and Recovery

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 157 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Restart token file contains explicit override statements.

If no state file (non-relational target) or no entry in a state table (relational target) for
the session:
PWXPC assigns the restart tokens supplied in the restart token file to the specified
sources. PWXPC assigns the oldest restart point of the restart tokens specified in the
restart token file to all remaining sources without restart tokens. See Configuring the
Restart Token File on page 162 for further information about explicit override
statements.

If state file (non-relational target) or entry in a state table (relational target) exists for
some but not all sources in the session:
PWXPC assigns the restart tokens supplied in the restart token file to the specified
sources. PWXPC assigns the restart tokens found in the state file or state tables to the
appropriate sources provided they have not been supplied in the restart token file.
PWXPC assigns the oldest restart point of the restart tokens available to all remaining
sources without restart tokens.

If state file (non-relational target) or entry in a state table (relational target) exists for all
sources in the session:
PWXPC assigns the restart tokens supplied in the restart token file to the specified
sources in the session. PWXPC assigns the restart tokens from the state file or state
tables to all remaining sources without restart tokens.

Restart token file contains special override statement.


PWXPC assigns the restart tokens supplied in the special override statement in the
restart token file to all sources. See Configuring the Restart Token File on page 162
for further information about the special override statement.

Restart token file contains special override statement and explicit override statements.
PWXPC assigns the restart tokens supplied in the restart token file in the explicit
override statements to the specified sources. PWXPC assigns the restart tokens supplied
in the special override statement to all remaining sources without restart tokens.

Default Restart Points


If you start a new CDC session and no restart token file exists, the Integration Service still
runs the session. Because no specific restart point has been provided, PWXPC passes null
restart tokens for all sources to PowerExchange. PWXPC issues message PWXPC_12060
indicating that the restart tokens for each source are NULL. PowerExchange, because it
receives null restart tokens from PWXPC, assigns the earliest possible restart point to each
source.
Warning: Using null restart tokens may not produce the desired results. Valid restart tokens
should always be supplied.

Start your extraction for a new CDC session at a point in the change stream where the source
and its target are in a consistent state. You do this by placing the restart tokens that match
that point in the change stream in the restart token file and doing a cold start of the CDC
session.
Understanding PWXPC Restart and Recovery

157

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 158 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

For example, a target table has been materialized from its source data and no new changes
have been made to the source data. Now you need to establish a starting extraction, or restart,
point in the change stream. You do this by using DTLUAPPL. DTLUAPPL is a
PowerExchange utility that generates restart points. After you have run DTLUAPPL, place
the generated restart tokens in the restart token file specified in the source CDC connection
and cold start the CDC session. PWXPC passes the restart tokens from the restart token file
to PowerExchange. PowerExchange extracts changes from the change stream from that restart
point forward.
Table 6-1 describes earliest starting extraction (restart) points PowerExchange uses if null
restart tokens are supplied for all sources:
Table 6-1. Default Starting Extraction Points for Sources
Source
Platform/
Database

CDC Change Connection

CDC Real-time Connection

MVS (all
sources)

Oldest Condense file recorded in the


CDCT.

Logger selects the best available restart point.


This is the oldest restart point for which an archive log
is available, or active log if there are no available
archive logs.

AS400

Oldest Condense file recorded in the


CDCT.

Oldest journal receiver still on the journal receiver


chain.

Oracle

Oldest Condense file recorded in the


CDCT.

Most current Oracle catalog dump.

MSSQL Server

n/a

Oldest data available in the Publication database.

UDB

n/a

Current log position at the time the capture catalog


was created.

PowerExchange only uses the default starting extraction point if all sources have null restart
tokens. PWXPC assigned the oldest restart point of the restart tokens available if there are
some sources without restart tokens.
For example, a new CDC session contains three sources called A, B, and C. The restart token
file contains restart points for sources A and B. The restart point for source A is older than
source B. Source C has no existing or supplied restart point. When you run the session,
PWXPC assigns source C the same restart point as source A since it is the oldest supplied
restart point. PWXPC does not assign the default starting extraction point discussed in Table
6-1 to source C because some sources have restart points.

Initializing and Running CDC Sessions


After the restart information for every source is determined, PWXPC:

158

Flushes the restart tokens to the state tables for relational targets and to the state file for
non-relational targets

Writes an empty restart token file

Chapter 6: Restart and Recovery

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 159 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Creates the initialization restart token file containing the reconciled restart information

PWXPC passes the restart tokens for all sources to PowerExchange. PowerExchange uses the
oldest restart token passed by PWXPC to start extracting data from the change stream.
PowerExchange does not pass data for a source until its restart point is reached. This prevents
targets from being updated with records processed in previous extraction runs.
PWXPC continually updates the restart tokens for each source in the state table or the state
file as it issues flushes target data. With relational target tables in the same database, the
Integration Service updates both the target tables and the restart tokens within a single
commit. The Integration Service does separate commits for each unique relational database.
With heterogeneous target, the restart tokens in one relational database may differ from those
in another relational database at specific points in time.
When using non-relational targets, the state file and the targets likely exist on completely
different machines. With non-relational targets, the Integration Service updates the targets
and the state file in separate operations. If the session fails after the Integration Service
commits data to the target but before it updates the restart tokens in the state file, targets may
receive duplicate data when restarted. On warm start, PWXPC uses the last restart tokens
written prior to the failure. As a result, PWXPC re-sends data which has already been applied
to the non-relational targets.

Ending CDC Sessions


Stop CDC sessions using PowerCenter and PowerExchange commands. See Stopping CDC
Sessions on page 170 for more information. Sessions can also fail or terminate unexpectedly.
When you stop a CDC session, PWXPC flushes any complete units of work that remain in its
buffer. PWXPC then waits for confirmation from the Integration Service that the flushed
data has been written to the targets. If it has, PWXPC writes the termination restart token file
with the final restart tokens and issues the following message:
PWXPC_12075 [INFO] [CDCRestart] Session complete. Next session will
restart at: : Restart 1 [restart1] : Restart 2 [restart2]

The Integration Service commits the flushed data to the targets, including the restart tokens
for relational targets. After the Integration Service writes the flushed data to any nonrelational targets, it updates the state file with the restart tokens.
If the session fails, the Integration Service rolls back any uncommitted data and the related
restart tokens for relational targets. This leaves only the last successfully committed UOW
data and restart tokens in the relational target tables. The Integration Service uses relational
database rollback capabilities to ensure that uncommitted data is removed during session
termination. Consistency between the restart tokens and the relational target data is
guaranteed because they are both committed within the same commit scope.
The Integration Service does not do rollback processing for non-relational targets. As a result,
duplicate data can occur on restart. You should account for this in your CDC session design.
Tip: If the possibility of duplicate data is unacceptable to your application, then design your

CDC sessions to use only relational targets.

Understanding PWXPC Restart and Recovery

159

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 160 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Creating Recovery Tables


Recovery Table Creation with PowerExchange Targets
The database user name PowerExchange uses to create the recovery tables varies based on the
PWXPC connection.

PWX DB2390 (DB2 for z/OS) Relational Connections


When PowerExchange creates the recovery tables for PWX DB2390 connections, it uses:

The default DB2 database (DSNDB04)

The PowerExchange Listener userid if it is running with SECURITY=0 or SECURITY=1


and so this user must be granted the appropriate table creation privilege

The PowerExchange Listener userid if it is running with SECURITY=2 and


MVSDB2AF=CAF and so this user must be granted the appropriate table creation
privilege

The database user name in the target connection if the PowerExchange Listener is running
with SECURITY=2 and MVSDB2AF=RRSAF and so this user must be granted the
appropriate table creation privilege

PWX DB2400 (DB2 for i5/OS) Relational Connections


When PowerExchange creates the recovery tables for PWX DB2400 connections, it uses:

The PowerExchange Listener userid if it is running with SECURITY=0 or SECURITY=1


and so this user must be granted the appropriate table creation privilege

The database user name in the target connection is if the PowerExchange Listener is
running with SECURITY=2 and so this user must be granted the appropriate table
creation privilege

The default journal so it must be enabled for the user name

PWX DB2UDB (DB2 for Linux/UNIX/Windows) Relational Connections


When PowerExchange creates the recovery tables for PWX DB2UDB connections, it uses:

The default tablespace for user-defined tables

The database user name in the target connection and so this user must be granted the
appropriate table creation privilege

PWX MSSQLServer (Microsoft SQL Server) Relational Connections


When PowerExchange creates the recovery tables for PWX MSSQLServer connections, it uses
the database user name in the target connection. This user must be granted the appropriate
table creation privilege.

160

Chapter 6: Restart and Recovery

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 161 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

PWX Oracle Relational Connections


When PowerExchange creates the recovery tables for PWX Oracle connections, it uses the
database user name in the target connection. This user must be granted the appropriate table
creation privilege.

PWX Sybase Relational Connections


When PowerExchange creates the recovery tables for PWX Sybase connections, it uses the
database user name in the target connection. This user must be granted the appropriate table
creation privilege.

Creating the Recovery Tables Manually


The Integration Service creates the recovery tables if they do not exist. See Recovery Table
Creation with PowerExchange Targets on page 160 for more information.
You can manually create the target recovery tables. If using PWX DB2390, PWX DB2400, or
PWX DB2UDB connections, consider manually creating the recovery tables so you can
specify table attributes.
Informatica provides SQL scripts in the following directory:
<PowerCenter installation_dir>\server\bin\RecoverySQL

Run one of the following scripts to create the recovery tables in the target database:
Table 6-2. Recovery Table SQL Scripts
Script

Database

create_schema_db2.sql

DB2

create_schema_inf.sql

Informix

create_schema_ora.sql

Oracle

create_schema_sql.sql

SQL Server

create_schema_syb.sql

Sybase

create_schema_ter.sql

Teradata

This is generic DDL. Make the appropriate changes for your environment.

Creating Recovery Tables

161

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 162 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Configuring the Restart Token File


You can configure the restart token file to specify the point from which you want to extract
source data. If you do not know the restart token file name and location, use one of the
following options:

Look at the PWXPC_12057 message in the session log. PWXPC includes the restart token
file folder and the restart token file name in this message.

Open the application connection associated with the source. The application connection
contains the restart token file name and folder location. This file name overrides the file
name you specified in the application connection.

If the restart token file name is not specified in the application connection, PWXPC uses
the application name, if specified. Otherwise, PWXPC uses the workflow name.

Warning: The Restart Token File Name must be unique for every session. Using non-unique
names causes unpredictable results including session failures and potential data loss.

Syntax Rules
The restart token file has these syntax rules:

No blank lines between statements.

Comment lines begin with:


<!--

Statements begin in any column.

Statement Syntax Format


<!-- comment text
RESTART1=restart1_token
RESTART2=restart2_token
extraction_map_name=restart1_token
extraction_map_name=restart2_token
...
extraction_map_namen=restart1_token
extraction_map_namen=restart2_token

Restart Token File Statements


The restart token file allows the following statements:

Comment Statement
<!-- comment text

Use the comment statement anywhere in the restart token file. The <!-- is required.

162

Chapter 6: Restart and Recovery

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 163 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Explicit Override Statement


extraction_map_name=restart1_token
extraction_map_name=restart2_token

The explicit override statement specifies restart tokens for a specific source. The source is
defined by specifying the extraction map name. Sources can have multiple extraction
mappings and therefore multiple extraction map names. Each source specification must
consist of a pair of lines with:

The source extraction map name (extraction_map_name) specified with the restart1_token
value

The source extraction map name (extraction_map_name) specified with the restart2_token

The extraction map name specified in the restart token file must match what is defined in the
CDC session. To determine the extraction map name:

Check the Extraction Map Name attribute in the Session Properties for relational sources

Check the Schema Name Override and Map Name Override attributes in the Session
Properties if using CDC data map sources. See Figure 5-4 on page 138. These attributes
override the source name in the CDC data map source.

Check the Schema Name and Map Name values in the source Metadata Extensions in
Designer if using CDC data map sources. See Figure 3-23 on page 61.

The restart1_token value varies based on capture source and is found in the following:

Sequence= value, minus the trailing 8 zeros, in the DTLUAPPL PRINT output

DTL__CAPXRESTART1 value when extracting data

Sequence token in PowerExchange messages (e.g., PWX-04564, PWX-09959)

Restart Token 1 in PWXPC messages (e.g. PWXPC_12060, PWXPC_12069)

The restart2_token value varies based on the capture source and is found in the following:

Restart= value in the DTLUAPPL PRINT output

DTL__CAPXRESTART2 value when extracting data

Logger token in PowerExchange messages (e.g., PWX-04564, PWX-09959)

Restart Token 2 in PWXPC messages (e.g. PWXPC_12060, PWXPC_12069)

If the session includes source extraction maps that do not have entries in the existing restart
token file, then the session executes without error. See Default Restart Points on page 157
for an explanation of what restart tokens PWXPC and PowerExchange use in this case.

Special Override Statement


RESTART1=restart1_token
RESTART2=restart2_token

The special override statement allows specifies for all sources in a session. The restart token
values (restart1_token and restart2_token) are described in detail in the Explicit Override
Statement.
If used, both RESTART1= and RESTART2= must be specified.
Configuring the Restart Token File

163

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 164 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

This override can be used in conjunction with explicit override statements to provide restart
tokens for sources which do not have explicit override statements.
An explicit override statement for a source takes precedence over the special override
statement for that source.

Restart Token File Example


<!-- Restart Tokens for existing tables -->
restart1=000000AD775600000000000000AD77560000000000000000
Restart2=C1E4E2D34040000000AD5F2C00000000
<!-- Restart Tokens for the Table: rrtb0001_RRTB_SRC_001 -->
d1dsn7.rrtb0001_RRTB_SRC_001=0000060D1DB2000000000000060D1DB20000000000000000
d1dsn7.rrtb0001_RRTB_SRC_001=C1E4E2D340400000013FF36200000000
<!-- Restart Tokens for the Table: rrtb0001_RRTB_SRC_002 -->
d1dsn7.rrtb0002_RRTB_SRC_002=000000A3719500000000000000A371950000000000000000
d1dsn7.rrtb0002_RRTB_SRC_002=C1E4E2D34040000000968FC600000000
<!-- Restart Tokens for the Table: rrtb0001_RRTB_SRC_004 -->
d1dsn7.rrtb0004_RRTB_SRC_004=000006D84E7800000000000006D84E780000000000000000
d1dsn7.rrtb0004_RRTB_SRC_004=C1E4E2D340400000060D1E6100000000

In the example, the session contains 7 source tables. The restart token file contains explicit
override statements for 3 sources: RRTB_SRC_001, RRTB_SRC_002, and
RRTB_SRC_004. It also contains the special override statement to provide the restart tokens
for the remainder of the sources in the session. When the session executes, PWXPC issues
message PWXPC_12060 as follows:
===============================
Session restart information:
===============================
Extraction Map Name
Restart Token 1
d1dsn7.rrtb0001_RRTB_SRC_001 0000060D1DB2000000000000060D1DB20000000000000000
d1dsn7.rrtb0002_RRTB_SRC_002 000000A3719500000000000000A371950000000000000000
d1dsn7.rrtb0003_RRTB_SRC_003 000000AD775600000000000000AD77560000000000000000
(special override)
d1dsn7.rrtb0004_RRTB_SRC_004 000006D84E7800000000000006D84E780000000000000000
d1dsn7.rrtb0005_RRTB_SRC_005 000000AD775600000000000000AD77560000000000000000
(special override)
d1dsn7.rrtb0006_RRTB_SRC_006 000000AD775600000000000000AD77560000000000000000
(special override)
d1dsn7.rrtb0007_RRTB_SRC_007 000000AD775600000000000000AD77560000000000000000
(special override)

Restart Token 2
C1E4E2D340400000013FF36200000000
C1E4E2D34040000000968FC600000000
C1E4E2D34040000000AD5F2C00000000

Source
Restart file
Restart file
Restart file

C1E4E2D340400000060D1E6100000000
C1E4E2D34040000000AD5F2C00000000

Restart file
Restart file

C1E4E2D34040000000AD5F2C00000000

Restart file

C1E4E2D34040000000AD5F2C00000000

Restart file

PWXPC displays the sources with explicit overrides with Restart file under the Source
column. The sources to which PWXPC assigns the special override restart tokens have
special override in parentheses.

164

Chapter 6: Restart and Recovery

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 165 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

PWXPC Restart and Recovery Operation


Enable a resume recovery strategy for CDC sessions. When you enable a resume recovery
strategy, the Integration Service provides recovery for the target table data and PWXPC
provides recovery for the CDC restart information.
PowerExchange on the source platform provides the CDC restart information, which consists
of restart tokens describing a specific start point in the change stream. PWXPC stores the
restart tokens for relational targets in recovery state tables in the target databases. For nonrelational targets, PWXPC stores the restart tokens in the recovery state file on the
Integration Service machine. For additional information about restart token processing, see
Understanding PWXPC Restart and Recovery on page 151.
PWXPC issues the following message when you specify a resume recovery strategy:
PWXPC_12094 [INFO] [CDCRestart] Advanced GMD recovery in affect. Recovery is automatic

PWXPC automatically recovers warm started sessions when a resume recovery strategy is
specified.

Enabling Session Recovery


Enabling recovery for a CDC session:
1.

Select Resume from last checkpoint for the Recovery Strategy in the Properties tab.
This is the only recovery strategy that enables PWXPC and the Integration Service to
recover CDC sessions.

2.

Change the Commit Type attribute from Target to Source.


CDC sessions always use source-based commit processing regardless of the Commit Type
attribute setting.

3.

Disable the Commit at End of File attribute in the Properties tab.


The Integration Service, after PWXPC has shutdown, issues a commit when the session
ends. Data written to the targets after PWXPC shuts down is not reflected in the restart
tokens. Disabling this flag ensures that PWXPC issues all commits.

Warning: If you are using the File Writer to write CDC data to flat files, do not enable
recovery processing. Data loss or duplication may occur since the restart tokens for all targets,
including relational targets, are compromised if there is a flat file target in the same session.

If you run a session with resume recovery strategy and the session fails, do not edit the
mapping or sessions the state table entry or file before you restart the session. Recovery is
compromised if changes are made. See Recovering from CDC Session Failures on page 173.
When the Integration Service resumes a session, it restores the session state of operation,
including the state of each source, target, and transformation. The Integration Service, in
conjunction with PWXPC, determines how much of the source data it needs to reprocess.
For additional information about the Integration Service recovery processing, see the
PowerCenterWorkflow Administration Guide.
PWXPC Restart and Recovery Operation

165

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 166 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Configuring CDC Sessions


You control PWXPC restart processing with session options and attributes. Ensure that all of
the appropriate session configuration is done.
The following table summarizes the options and attributes with defaults that must be changed
for CDC sessions:
Table 6-3. CDC Sessions - Recommended Settings
Option / Attribute

Location

Recommended Value and Explanation

Commit Type

Properties Tab

Source.
The default is Target. The Integration Service automatically
overrides it to Source. You cannot change Commit On End Of File
unless you change Commit Type to Source.

Commit On End Of
File

Properties Tab

Disabled.
The default is enabled. The Integration Service performs a commit
when the session ends. This commit occurs after PWXPC commits
the restart tokens. Duplicate data can occur on restart if this default
is enabled.

Recovery Strategy

Properties Tab

Resume from last checkpoint.


The default value is Fail task and continue workflow. PWXPC
requires Resume from last checkpoint.
See Enabling Session Recovery on page 165.

Stop on errors

Config Object Tab

1.
The default value is 0. Errors encountered by the Integration Service
while writing to the target database or target files are not counted by
default. Writer threshold errors can include key constraint violations,
loading nulls into a not null field, and database trigger responses.
PWXPC is unaware that the writer has not applied the data to the
target and so advances the restart tokens. Set this value to 1 to
ensure target data and restart token integrity is maintained.
See the PowerCenter Workflow Administration Guide.

Application Name

Application
Connection

Unique name.
The default is the first 20 characters of the WorkFlow Name.The
default may not result in a unique name. Specify a unique name.
See Application Names on page 167.

166

Chapter 6: Restart and Recovery

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 167 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Table 6-3. CDC Sessions - Recommended Settings


Option / Attribute

Location

Recommended Value and Explanation

Restart Token File


Name

Application
Connection

Unique name.
The default is either:
- the WorkFlow Name if no Application Name is specified
- the Application Name
The default may not result in a unique name. Specify a unique
name.
See The Restart Token File on page 154.

Number of Runs to
Keep RestartToken
File

Application
Connection

Value greater than 0.


The default is 0. PWXPC keeps only one backup copy of the restart
token initialization and termination files. Specify a value greater than
0 so a history is available for recovery purposes.
See The Restart Token File on page 154.

Application Names
PowerExchange, when using ODBC connections, stores the restart tokens in the
PowerExchange CDEP file on the extraction platform. PWXPC stores the restart tokens in:

The state file on the Integration Service platform, for non-relational sources

The state table in the target database, for relational sources

PowerExchange always stores extraction history information in the CDEP file for each
application name, regardless of whether the CDEP is being used to maintain restart tokens or
not. With PWXPC the CDEP file is used for history only.
An application name is required when using PWXPC. Each CDC session must use a unique
application name in order to prevent failures due to conflicts in the CDEP. Application
names cannot be shared with other CDC sessions.
Warning: Do not use a PWXPC CDC session application name when performing a Database
Row Test in PowerExchange Navigator or when using the DTLUAPPL utility. Using the
same application name as a PWXPC CDC session in another CDC session, a Navigator row
test, or in DTLUAPPL fails with message:
PWX-04553 Error restart tokens [required | not allowed] for application
"application name"

Using DTLUAPPL with CDC Sessions


Use the PowerExchange DTLUAPPL utility to generate restart tokens for CDC sessions
instead of using the default restart point. Update the restart token file with the generated
restart tokens to establish the starting extraction point in the change stream.

PWXPC Restart and Recovery Operation

167

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 168 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Use a unique application name when generating restart tokens with DTLUAPPL so you avoid
any conflicts with existing application names used for CDC sessions.
For more information on DTLUAPPL, see the PowerExchange Utilities Guide.
For more information on configuring the restart token file, see Configuring the Restart
Token File on page 162.

Example: Using DTLUAPPL


The registration on the ADD RSTTKN statement must exist. This registration must be
associated with the instance name specified on the MOD APPL statement. You can use either
ADD APPL or MOD APPL for a new application name. DTLUAPPL creates the application
name if it does not exist when MOD APPL is used.
Tip: Select an application name and use it only with DTLUAPPL when generating restart

tokens.
The following example generates restart tokens for source registration DB2DEMO1 using an
application name of tokens and then prints those restart tokens:
MOD APPL tokens DSN7 RSTTKN GENERATE
ADD RSTTKN db2demo1
END APPL tokens
PRINT APPL tokens

The DTLUAPPL prints the generated tokens because the PRINT APPL statement is
specified:
Application name=<tokens> Rsttkn=<1> Ainseq=<0> Preconfig=<N>
FirstTkn =<>
LastTkn
=<>
CurrentTkn=<>
Registration name=<db2demo1.1> tag=<DB2DSN7db2demo11>
Sequence=<000007248B9600000000000007248B9600000000>
Restart =<D2D1D4D34040000007248B0E00000000>

DTLUAPPL does not generate the complete restart1_token value which is shown in the
SEQUENCE token. You must be add the trailing four bytes (eight digits) of zeros manually
when you update the restart token file. DTLUAPPL does generate the complete
restart_token2 value in the Restart= token. You can copy this value to the restart token file.
Tip: You can use same restart tokens for multiple source tables in the restart token file to start

extracting changes from the same point in the change stream. You only need to run
DTLUAPPL multiple times if you want to start extracting changes from different locations in
the change stream for different sources.
Using the tokens in this example, the restart token file looks as follows:
D1DSN7.db2demo1=000007248B9600000000000007248B960000000000000000
D1DSN7.db2demo1=D2D1D4D34040000007248B0E00000000

168

Chapter 6: Restart and Recovery

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 169 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Starting CDC Sessions


Use the Workflow Manager, Workflow Monitor, or pmcmd to run a workflow or task. You
can choose to run the entire workflow, part of a workflow, or a task in the workflow. You can
choose to warm start, recover, or cold start workflows and tasks.

Cold Start Processing


Cold start workflows and tasks by selecting the cold start command in Workflow Manager,
Workflow Monitor, or pmcmd. When you request cold start, PWXPC issues the following
message:
PWXPC_12091 [INFO] [CDCRestart] Cold start requested

PWXPC performs the following tasks for cold start:


1.

PWXPC reads the restart tokens from the restart token file only. See Determining the
Restart Point on page 155.

2.

PWXPC commits the restart tokens to the state tables and file and issues message
PWXPC_12104.

3.

PWXPC continues processing and committing data and restart tokens until the session
ends or is stopped.

Warm Start Processing


Warm start workflows and tasks by selecting the start or restart command in Workflow
Manager, Workflow Monitor, or pmcmd. When you request warm start, PWXPC issues the
following message:
PWXPC_12092 [INFO] [CDCRestart] Warm start requested. Targets will be resynchronized
automatically if required

PWXPC automatically performs recovery when a workflow or task is warm started. You do
not need to recover workflows and tasks before you restart them.
PWXPC performs the following tasks for warm start:
1.

PWXPC reconciles the restart tokens from the restart token file and from the recovery
state tables and file. See Determining the Restart Point on page 155.

2.

For heterogeneous targets, PWXPC queries the Integration Service about the commit
levels of all targets. If all targets in the session are at the same commit level, PWXPC
skips recovery processing.

3.

If recovery is required for heterogeneous targets, PWXPC re-reads the data for the last
UOW committed to higher-level targets and flushes it to those targets with the lower
commit level. The Integration Service commits any flushed data and restart tokens to any
relational targets and updates any non-relational files.
Note: PWXPC does not read the restart token file if recovery is required.

PWXPC Restart and Recovery Operation

169

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 170 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

4.

If recovery is not required and the reconciled restart tokens differ from those in the state
tables and file, PWXPC commits the reconciled restart tokens and issues message
PWXPC_12104.

5.

PWXPC continues processing and committing data and restart tokens until the session
ends or is stopped.

Recovery Processing
Recover workflows and tasks by selecting the recover command in Workflow Manager,
Workflow Monitor, or pmcmd. When you request recovery, PWXPC issues the following
message:
PWXPC_12093 [INFO] [CDCRestart] Recovery run requested. Targets will be resynchronized if
required and processing will terminate

Select Recover to populate the restart token file with the restart tokens for all sources in the
CDC session so that you can cold start. You can also use recovery to ensure the targets and
restart tokens are in a consistent state.
PWXPC automatically performs recovery when a workflow or task is warm started. You do
not need to recover workflows and tasks before you restart them. PWXPC performs the
following tasks for recovery:
1.

PWXPC reads the restart tokens from the recovery state tables and file.

2.

PWXPC creates the initialization restart token file with the reconciled restart tokens.

3.

For heterogeneous targets, PWXPC queries the Integration Service about the commit
levels of all targets. If all targets in the session are at the same commit level, PWXPC
skips recovery processing.

4.

If recovery is required for heterogeneous targets, PWXPC re-reads the data for the last
UOW committed to higher-level targets and flushes it to those targets with the lower
commit level. The Integration Service commits any flushed data and restart tokens to any
relational targets and updates any non-relational files.
Note: PWXPC does not read the restart token file if recovery is required.

5.

PWXPC updates the restart token file with the final restart tokens, creates the
termination restart token file, and ends.

You can now warm start or cold start the workflow or task to process changed data from the
point of interruption.

Stopping CDC Sessions


Stop CDC sessions through PowerCenter by issuing the stop command from Workflow
Monitor or pmcmd. You can also stop CDC sessions through PowerExchange by issuing the
STOPTASK command or by running the DTLUTSK utility. For information about the
STOPTASK command and the syntax of the DTLUTSK utility, see the description of
DTLUTSK in the PowerExchange Utilities Guide.

170

Chapter 6: Restart and Recovery

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 171 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

When you stop a workflow or task gracefully by issuing the stop command through
PowerCenter or PowerExchange, the following action occurs:
1.

The Integration Service requests PWXPC to stop if you issue the PowerCenter stop
command.
If you issue the PowerExchange stop command, it sends an end of file to PWXPC.

2.

PWXPC performs end of file processing to flush the remaining uncommitted complete
units of work to the targets and issues message PWXPC_12101. PWXPC also commits
the restart tokens and issues message PWXPC_12068.

3.

The Integration Service processes all of data in the pipeline and writes it to the targets.

4.

The Integration Service sends an acknowledgement to PWXPC indicating that the


targets have been updated.

5.

PWXPC issues message PWXPC_12075, writes the termination restart token file, and
shuts down.

6.

The Integration Service ends the session successfully.

You can also stop CDC sessions gracefully if you:

Use Idle Time=0 in the PWX CDC Real Time connection which instructs PowerExchange
to stop processing at end of log. See Configuring Idle Time on page 115.

Use a PWX CDC Change connection to extract changes from condense files.
When you use PowerExchange batch change extraction mode for condense files, the
extraction automatically ends when all condensed data is read.

You can also stop a workflow or task using the abort command in Workflow Monitor or
pmcmd. For information about the abort command, see the PowerCenterWorkflow
Administration Guide.

Changing CDC Sessions


The state table entry and state file name for CDC sessions contains numerous repository
attributes. See Understanding PWXPC Restart and Recovery on page 151. Consider this
when you change CDC sessions.
For example, you add a new relational source and target to an existing CDC session that
includes relational and non-relational targets. You then execute the changed CDC session.
The Integration Service does not use the existing entry in the state table or the existing state
file because some repository attributes are now different from the previous run. Instead, the
Integration Service creates a new entry in the state table and a new state file. Because the
Integration Service creates new state information for your session, PWXPC begins reading
from a different location in the change stream. Your target tables and files are now out-ofsync with their source tables and files.

PWXPC Restart and Recovery Operation

171

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 172 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

To change a CDC session and restart it from the point of interruption:


1.

Gracefully stop the workflow. See Stopping CDC Sessions on page 170.

2.

After the workflow stops successfully, issue the Recover command for the CDC session.
When you recover tasks, PWXPC writes the ending restart tokens for the session into the
restart token file.

3.

Change the session or workflow as desired.

4.

Ensure that the restart token file specified in the source CDC connection specifies the
restart token file updated in the recovery session.

5.

Optionally, update the restart token file to add or remove sources.

6.

Cold start the CDC session.

Example: Adding a New Source to an Existing Session


In this example, a new source (RRTB_SRC_004) is added to an existing CDC session
containing three sources. The restart points for the existing sources are maintained.
DTLUAPPL is used to generate a restart token representing the current end-of-log in the
change stream.
To add a new source to an existing session - example:
1.

Stop the workflow by issuing the Stop command in Workflow Monitor.

2.

After the workflow stops, use the Workflow Monitor and issue the Recover Task
command from Workflow Monitor to run a recovery session. This displays the current
restart points. The session log shows the following:

CDCDispatcher> PWXPC_12060 [INFO] [CDCRestart]


===============================
Session restart information:
===============================
Extraction Map Name
Restart Token 1
d1dsn7.rrtb0002_RRTB_SRC_002
000000AD220F00000000000000AD220F0000000000000000
storage
d1dsn7.rrtb0001_RRTB_SRC_001
000000AD220F00000000000000AD220F0000000000000000
storage
d1dsn7.rrtb0003_RRTB_SRC_003
000000AD220F00000000000000AD220F0000000000000000
storage

Restart Token 2
C1E4E2D34040000000AD0D9C00000000

Source
GMD

C1E4E2D34040000000AD0D9C00000000

GMD

C1E4E2D34040000000AD0D9C00000000

GMD

PWXPC places the restart tokens in the restart token file specified in the CDC
application connection.
3.

Make any necessary changes to the mapping, session, and workflow to add the new
source, RRTB_SRC_004.

4.

Run DTLUAPPL with RSTTKN GENERATE to generate restart tokens for the current
end-of-log. Use the following DTLUAPPL control cards to do this:
mod

APPL dummy DSN7 rsttkn generate


mod rsttkn rrtb004
end appl dummy
print appl dummy

172

Chapter 6: Restart and Recovery

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 173 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

The PRINT command produces the following output:


Registration name=<rrtb004.1> tag=<DB2DSN7rrtb0041>
Sequence=<00000DBF240A0000000000000DBF240A00000000>
Restart =<C1E4E2D3404000000DBF238200000000>

Add eight zeroes to the end of the Sequence= value to create the restart token file value.
5.

Update the restart token file to add the new source and its tokens. The updated file looks
as follows:

<!-- existing sources


d1dsn7.rrtb0001_RRTB_SRC_001=000000AD220F00000000000000AD220F0000000000000000
d1dsn7.rrtb0001_RRTB_SRC_001=C1E4E2D34040000000AD0D9C00000000
d1dsn7.rrtb0002_RRTB_SRC_002=000000AD220F00000000000000AD220F0000000000000000
d1dsn7.rrtb0002_RRTB_SRC_002=C1E4E2D34040000000AD0D9C00000000
d1dsn7.rrtb0003_RRTB_SRC_003=000000AD220F00000000000000AD220F0000000000000000
d1dsn7.rrtb0003_RRTB_SRC_003=C1E4E2D34040000000AD0D9C00000000
<!-- new source
d1dsn7.rrtb0004_RRTB_SRC_004=00000DBF240A0000000000000DBF240A0000000000000000
d1dsn7.rrtb0004_RRTB_SRC_004=C1E4E2D3404000000DBF238200000000

6.

Cold start the session.


PWXPC passes these restart tokens to PowerExchange to recommence extracting changes
from the change stream. Note that this restart point is earlier than the one just generated
for the new source. The new source does not receive any changes until the first change
following its restart point is encountered.

For additional information, see:

Configuring the Restart Token File on page 162

Using DTLUAPPL with CDC Sessions on page 167

Recovering from CDC Session Failures


If you run a session with a resume recovery strategy and the session fails, do not edit the state
information or the mapping for the session before you restart the session.
CDC sessions fail for a number of reasons, such as:

Permanent errors such as source or target data errors

Transitory errors such as infrastructure problems, server crashes, and network availability
issues.

If the session fails because of transitory errors, restart the session after the source of the
transitory error is corrected. PWXPC automatically recovers warm started sessions, if required
although you can also run a recovery session. See Recovery Processing on page 170.
Note: You cannot override the restart point if recovery processing is required. PWXPC does

not read the restart token file if you warm start and recovery is required or if you run a
recovery session.
CDC sessions also fail because of permanent errors, such as SQL failures or other database
errors. You must correct permanent errors before restarting the CDC session. With some
failures, you can correct the error and then restart the CDC session. In other cases, you need
to re-materialize the target table from the source table before you recommence applying

PWXPC Restart and Recovery Operation

173

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 174 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

changes to it. If you re-materialize the target table, you need to provide restart tokens
matching the new restart point in the change stream and the cold start the CDC session.

Example: Session Recovery


In this example, a CDC session with relational targets is aborted using the Workflow
Monitor. The Restart Task command is issued from the Workflow Monitor for the CDC
session. PWXPC issues the following message:
PWXPC_12092 [INFO] [CDCRestart] Warm start requested. Targets will be resynchronized
automatically if required

PWXPC automatically recovers when the session is warm started. PWXPC issues the
following messages displaying the restart tokens found for the session and its sources:
CDCDispatcher> PWXPC_12060 [INFO] [CDCRestart]
===============================
Session restart information:
===============================
Extraction Map Name
Restart Token 1
d1dsn8.rrtb0004_RRTB_SRC_004
00000FCA65840000000000000D2E004A00000000FFFFFFFF
storage
d1dsn8.rrtb0009_RRTB_SRC_009
00000FCA65840000000000000D2E004A00000000FFFFFFFF
storage
d1dsn8.rrtb0005_RRTB_SRC_005
00000FCA65840000000000000D2E004A00000000FFFFFFFF
storage
d1dsn8.rrtb0006_RRTB_SRC_006
00000FCA65840000000000000D2E004A00000000FFFFFFFF
storage
d1dsn8.rrtb0008_RRTB_SRC_008
00000FCA65840000000000000D2E004A00000000FFFFFFFF
storage
d1dsn8.rrtb0003_RRTB_SRC_003
00000FCA65840000000000000D2E004A00000000FFFFFFFF
storage
d1dsn8.rrtb0002_RRTB_SRC_002
00000FCA65840000000000000D2E004A00000000FFFFFFFF
storage
d1dsn8.rrtb0001_RRTB_SRC_001
00000FCA65840000000000000D2E004A00000000FFFFFFFF
storage
d1dsn8.rrtb0007_RRTB_SRC_007
00000FCA65840000000000000D2E004A00000000FFFFFFFF
storage

Restart Token 2
C1E4E2D3404000000D21B1A500000000

Source
GMD

C1E4E2D3404000000D21B1A500000000

GMD

C1E4E2D3404000000D21B1A500000000

GMD

C1E4E2D3404000000D21B1A500000000

GMD

C1E4E2D3404000000D21B1A500000000

GMD

C1E4E2D3404000000D21B1A500000000

GMD

C1E4E2D3404000000D21B1A500000000

GMD

C1E4E2D3404000000D21B1A500000000

GMD

C1E4E2D3404000000D21B1A500000000

GMD

PWXPC issues the PWXPC_12069 message when it detects that recovery is required. The
12069 message usually includes the begin-UOW (from) and end-UOW (to) restart tokens for
the oldest uncommitted UOW that PWXPC re-reads during recovery. PWXPC stores endUOW restart tokens in the state table and file unless sub-packet commit is used. See
Configuring Commit Threshold on page 121.
CDCDispatcher> PWXPC_12069 [INFO] [CDCRestart] Running in recovery mode. Reader will resend the the oldest
uncommitted UOW to resync targets:
from: Restart 1 [00000FCA65840000000000000D2E004A00000000FFFFFFFF] : Restart 2 [C1E4E2D3404000000D21B1A500000000]
to: Restart 1 [00000FCA65840000000000000D300D8000000000FFFFFFFF] : Restart 2 [C1E4E2D3404000000D21B1A500000000].

The from restart tokens are the same as those displayed in the PWXPC_12060 messages for all
sources. This restart token represents the start point in the change stream for the oldest
uncommitted UOW. The to restart tokens represent the end of the oldest uncommitted
UOW. Since the application connection for this session specifies sub-packet commit, the
Restart 2 value is the begin-UOW value in both cases. The Restart 1 values represent the start
and end change records in the Restart 2 UOW.
PWXPC rereads the changes between the two restart token values in the 12069 message and
issues a commit for the data and the restart tokens. The Integration Service writes the data to
the target tables and the restart tokens to the state table.
PWXPC and the Integration Service continue to read and write data and restart tokens until
the session ends or is stopped.

174

Chapter 6: Restart and Recovery

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 175 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Managing Session Log and Restart Token File History


When you run CDC sessions, session log and restart token file history is often useful for
recovery situations. You can use these historical files to find previous restart points when data
needs to be re-extracted.
By default, the Integration Service keeps a single session log for each workflow or session.
Change the Save session log for these runs in either the session or Session Configuration
properties to specify the number or runs to keep the session logs. You can also change the
Save session log by attribute to keep session logs by timestamp instead of number of runs. For
more information about archiving session logs, see the PowerCenterWorkflow Administration
Guide.
PWXPC keeps a single pair of initialization and termination restart token files. In the source
CDC connection, request more than a single copy by specifying a value larger than 1 in the
Number of Runs to Keep RestartToken File attribute.
Figure 6-1 shows an example of an Application Connection that specifies that 10 copies of the
restart token file be maintained in the Restart Token File Folder:
Figure 6-1. Application Connection - Number of Restart Token Files

You can determine starting and ending restart points for each extraction using historical
copies of the restart token file. You need historical copies of the session logs to re-extract
changes at any point in between the session start and end.
When PWXPC issues a real-time flush to commit data to the targets, it issues message
PWXPC_10081. This message contains the restart tokens at that point in time:
PWXPC_10081 [INFO] [CDCDispatcher] raising real-time flush with restart tokens
[<restart1_token>], [<restart2_token>] <because UOW Count [<n>] is reached.> | <because
Real-time Flush Latency [<n>] occurred.>

PWXPC Restart and Recovery Operation

175

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 176 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

To restart an extraction from a specific commit point, use the restart tokens in the
appropriate 10081 message to populate the restart token file and cold start the CDC session.
PWXPC passes the restart token file values to PowerExchange to extract the data from that
point forward.

176

Chapter 6: Restart and Recovery

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 177 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Chapter 7

Flexible Key Custom


Transformation
This section covers the following topics:

Target Key Transformations, 178

Group Source and Flexible Transformations, 187

177

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 178 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Target Key Transformations


The Flexible Target Key Custom transformation has been developed to address the case where
a data target has its Primary Key mapped to a column in a PowerExchange Change Data
Capture source, which may be subject to update.
Prior to the implementation of the Flexible Target Key facility, the only way to identify these
changes to a key field was to pass the full record before and after image in the change stream.
For sessions involving large amounts of data this overhead could be significant.
For those wishing to keep network traffic to a minimum, PowerExchange has been enhanced
to allow indicators to be added to specific fields. These indicators identify instances where
that field has changed, and comprise both a before image field and a change indicator for
any given field. From this information a delete/insert pair can then be generated for the
target.
Figure 7-1 shows the process:
Figure 7-1. Primary key updates from a source relational table

Here we see the that COL1 is updated from an A to a C. COL1 is marked as the primary key
for the target table and is therefore treated as a delete of row A and an insert of row C.

178

Chapter 7: Flexible Key Custom Transformation

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 179 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Configuring the PowerExchange Extraction Map


To ensure enough information is passed through to PowerCenter for a column, or columns,
intended for use as a target primary key, a change indicator and before image field must
be associated with the PowerExchange extraction map.
To configure an extraction map:
1.

To add the before image and change indicator right click on the required extraction
group.

2.

Open the group as shown below:

Target Key Transformations

179

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 180 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

180

3.

Open the required extraction map by either right-clicking and selecting open , or by
double-clicking the required extraction map.

4.

Right-click the column which requires the before image and change indicator to be set.

Chapter 7: Flexible Key Custom Transformation

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 181 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

5.

Select Amend Control Indicator/Before Image Extensions

Target Key Transformations

181

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 182 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

6.

To set the change indicator, select and add the required column by double-clicking or
highlighting it and then clicking Add. When all the required change indicators have been
set up, click the Before Images tab.

7.

Repeat the process for columns which will require the before image to be included with
the change capture data.

Note: The BI and CI column names can be changed on these screens by single-clicking and

editing. The following sections in this chapter will refer to the default names.

Configuring PowerCenter
The PowerExchange Change Data Capture (CDC) source will now need to be imported. This
must be done through the Import from PowerExchange option under Source Analyzer in the
PowerCenter Designer. For more information on importing a CDC source see Working
with Extraction Map Definitions on page 57.
After the CDC source has been imported, the target definitions will be required. Import them
using the Target Designer in the PowerCenter Designer. For more information about
importing a target see Source and Target Definitions on page 23.

182

Chapter 7: Flexible Key Custom Transformation

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 183 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

The following example will work with a DB2 data capture source and a DB2 target table. The
structure of the source CDC table is:
Figure 7-2. DB2 Extraction Map Source Mapping

Note: The columns prefixed DTL_CI and DTL_BI are the change indicator and before image

respectively which are vital for this flexible transformation. The DTL__CAPX columns are
PowerExchange capture columns.
The target is a DB2 table of the following structure:
Figure 7-3. DB2 Target Table Mapping

The source table has a primary key of CUSTOMER_ID, and the PARTNER_CUST_ID is
an attribute of the table. The transformation will load the data into the target table where the
PARTNER_CUST_ID is the primary key, and the CUSTOMER_ID is an attribute of that
table.
In this case, if the PARTNER_CUST_ID changes in the source table, a delete and insert will
be required for the target.

Target Key Transformations

183

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 184 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Now drag the PowerExchange CDC source, and the target into the mapping as below:
Figure 7-4. DB2 Source to DB2 Target CDC mapping

Note: Any of the control information including BI and CI columns could, if required, be

defined in the target definition.

Create the Flexible Transformation


1.

From the Transformation option, select Create and then select a transformation type of
FLXKEYTRANS.

This create will cause a transformation to appear.


2.

184

Link into the transformation the required columns from the source for the target. Also,
the transformation will require the BI and CI indicators that were assigned earlier in

Chapter 7: Flexible Key Custom Transformation

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 185 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

PowerExchange (see Configuring the PowerExchange Extraction Map on page 179). A


final column DTL__CAPXACTION should also be added to the transformation.
3.

The BI and CI columns need to be linked to the Flexible transformation. Right-click the
transformation you have just created and select Edit. From within the edit dialog box,
select the Source Column Map tab and add the columns to which the relevant before
images and change indicators are assigned.

Note: The example above shows a single column primary key. Multiple columns can be

added here when the target primary key demands.

Target Key Transformations

185

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 186 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

186

4.

Link the transformation to the target. Only link the required data columns from the
transformation to the target. No links will exist from the transformation to the target for
the CI and BI columns, nor for the DTL__CAPXACTION column unless required in
the target. This will result in the following mapping:

5.

Create the workflow from the mapping as normal.

Chapter 7: Flexible Key Custom Transformation

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 187 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Group Source and Flexible Transformations


The PowerExchange Group Source functionality allows changed data for multiple sources or
multiple records in a single source to be read during a single pass. See PowerExchange Group
Source on page 71.. The Flexible Target Key Custom transformation also supports this
functionality.
The following example shows how data changes captured from a VSAM file, split into two
different record types, can be processed through a single Flexible transformation and applied
to two output DB2 tables.
1.

For an NRDB source create a data map as defined in the relevant PowerExchange
Adapter Guide.

2.

Amend the data map to assign the relevant record id value test as shown in the dialog box
below.

Note: In this example a data map has been created for records with a REC_TYPE of A in the

example above, and for REC_TYPE of B. These data maps are ksdss1.ksdsm1 and
ksdss2.ksdsm2 respectively.
3.

Now register each of these data maps for PowerExchange capture. This process is
described in the relevant PowerExchange Adapter Guide.

4.

Assign the BI and CI PowerExchange fields to the extraction map as shown above in
Configuring the PowerExchange Extraction Map on page 179.

Group Source and Flexible Transformations

187

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 188 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

5.

Now import these two extraction maps as data sources into the PowerCenter Designer
using Import from PowerExchange.

6.

Import the relevant data targets. In this example the two input capture streams will be
written to two separate DB2 tables.

7.

When the mapping is created it will look similar to the following:.

Note how the Flexible transformation contains the columns for both of the PowerExchange
change data input sources, and that they are linked to their own individual output tables. The
Flexible Transaction includes Input and Output Groups. An input and output group is added
when the flexible transformation is created, but subsequent input/output groups will be
required for each source. These are added when you Edit the transformation and select the

188

Chapter 7: Flexible Key Custom Transformation

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 189 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Ports tab shown below and then use the Create Input Group and Output Group buttons
(the Create Input Group button is highlighted here):

Before validating the mapping the before imaged and change indicators will need to be
assigned to ports as shown in step 4 on page 187.

Group Source and Flexible Transformations

189

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 190 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

190

Chapter 7: Flexible Key Custom Transformation

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 191 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Part 3: PowerExchange ODBC

This part contains the following chapters:

Installing PowerExchange ODBC, 193

Working with Mappings, 197

Configuring Connections, 205

Working with Sessions, 211

PowerExchange Restart and Recovery, 221

191

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 192 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

192

Part 3: PowerExchange ODBC

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 193 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Chapter 8

Installing PowerExchange
ODBC
This chapter includes the following topics:

Overview, 194

Creating ODBC Data Sources, 195

193

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 194 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Overview
Before installing and configuring the PowerExchange ODBC connection, you must install
and configure PowerCenter and PowerExchange.
Note: When connecting to PowerExchange, Informatica recommends using PWXPC instead

of PowerExchange ODBC. PWXPC has additional functionality as well as improved


performance and superior CDC recovery and restart. See Functional Comparison between
PWXPC and PowerExchange ODBC on page 4.

Installation Requirements
To use PowerExchange ODBC connections with PowerCenter, the following products must
be installed:

PowerCenter 8.5.1. For more information about installing PowerCenter see the
PowerCenter Installation Guide.

PowerExchange 8.5.1. Install PowerExchange on the PowerCenter Client and Integration


Service machines. For more information about installing PowerExchange see the
PowerExchange Installation Guide.

The PowerCenter Client, Integration Service and Repository Server software needs to be
installed on the appropriate platforms. The PowerExchange software needs to be installed on
the same PowerCenter Client and Server machines.
If you have installed the 32-bit version of Integration Service, you must install the 32-bit
version of PWXPC and of PowerExchange. If you have installed the 64-bit version of
Integration Service, you must install the 64-bit version of PWXPC and of PowerExchange.

194

Chapter 8: Installing PowerExchange ODBC

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 195 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Creating ODBC Data Sources


You can create ODBC data sources on the PowerCenter Client and Integration Service
machines.

Creating ODBC Data Sources on the PowerCenter Client Machine


On the PowerCenter client machine, you need to define ODBC data sources so that the
metadata for PowerExchange sources and targets can be imported.
To create an ODBC data source:
1.

Click Control Panel > Administrative Tools >Data Sources (ODBC).

2.

Click the System DSN tab.

3.

Click the Add button.

4.

Select the Informatica PowerExchange driver from the list of available drivers.

5.

Click Finish.

6.

Enter a name for the data source in the Name box.

7.

Select the location from the Location pull-down list. This is name defined on a NODE=
statement defined within the PowerExchange configuration file (dbmover.cfg).

8.

Select the data source type from the Type pull-down list. Depending on the data source
selected you will be presented with other specific properties that you can set.

9.

Complete all properties parameters, and click OK. The ODBC data source is created.

For more information about creating ODBC data sources, see "Using ODBC with
PowerExchange" in the PowerExchange Reference Manual.

Creating ODBC Data Sources on the Integration Service Machine


On the machine running the Integration Service, you need to define ODBC data sources so
that the workflow accessing PowerExchange sources and targets can connect to the
PowerExchange Listener to extract the data.

Creating a PowerExchange ODBC Data Source on Windows


Follow the instructions in Creating ODBC Data Sources on the PowerCenter Client
Machine on page 195.

Creating a PowerExchange ODBC Data Source on UNIX or Linux


Update the appropriate ODBC.INI file to define the ODBC data sources for
PowerExchange. The data source entries in the ODBC.INI file have the following format:
[<data source name>]
DRIVER=/<PowerExchange full install path>/libdtlodbc.sl

Creating ODBC Data Sources

195

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 196 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

DESCRIPTION='<Descriptive Text for Data Source>'


LOCATION=<data source node from dbmover.cfg>
DBTYPE=< Access method for file or database>

(other ODBC parameters as appropriate)

For more information about ODBC data source parameters (both mandatory and optional)
for a specific DBTYPE, see the PowerExchange Reference Manual.
The <data source name> defined in the odbc.ini is specified in the Connect String value of
the ODBC Connection in PowerCenter. This connect string causes the PowerExchange
ODBC driver to be loaded and the specified location to be contacted to extract or load the
data. For more information about ODBC connectivity with PowerCenter, see the
PowerCenter Configuration Guide.

196

Chapter 8: Installing PowerExchange ODBC

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 197 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Chapter 9

Working with Mappings

This chapter includes the following topics:

Overview, 198

Working with Source and Target Definitions for PowerExchange Batch, 199

Working with Source Definitions for PowerExchange Change or Real-time, 202

197

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 198 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Overview
A mapping is a set of source and target definitions linked by transformation objects that
define the rules for data transformation. Mappings represent the data flow between sources
and targets.
Source and target definitions represent metadata for sources and targets. When you create a
source definition, its structure differs depending on the type of source it represents:

Non-relational sources require a multi-group source definition.

Relational sources use a single-group source definition.

The source qualifier for a source definition also differs in structure depending on the type of
source definition.
After you create a source or target definition, you can include it in a mapping to extract data
from the source or load data to the target. You can extract source data in batch, change, or
real-time mode. You can use one source definition and one mapping for all modes.
For a list of sources and targets that PowerExchange ODBC Interface supports, see Table 1-4
on page 10. This table also lists whether the Integration Service can read the source data in
batch, change, or real-time mode.

198

Chapter 9: Working with Mappings

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 199 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Working with Source and Target Definitions for


PowerExchange Batch
With PowerExchange ODBC, you can create source or target definitions to access VSAM and
sequential datasets (flat files), Adabas, DataCom, DB2, IDMS, or IMS databases. You create
the source and target definitions identically regardless of the database type. After you create a
source or target definition, you can edit it.
For non-relational sources, the metadata imported is from the PowerExchange data map
created through the PowerExchange Navigator. In the case of DB2/390 and DB2/400, the
metadata is obtained either directly from the DB2 catalog or from a PowerExchange data
map.

Importing a Source or Target Definition


You connect to a PowerExchange Listener to import a source or target definition using
ODBC. Therefore, the data map must be sent to the PowerExchange Listener before it can be
imported using an ODBC connection in Designer.
When you connect to the PowerExchange Listener, the Designer displays a list of schemas
and tables. Before you connect, you can filter the metadata the Designer displays by schema
name. Select a table from the displayed list to create the source or target definition.
When you import a DB2/390 or DB2/400 source definition through a PowerExchange
Listener, the Designer imports the primary keys.

Working with Source and Target Definitions for PowerExchange Batch

199

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 200 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

To import a source or target definition:


1.

Click Sources > Import from Database in the Source Analyzer if importing a source
definition. Click Targets>Import from Database in the Target Designer if importing a
target definition.
The following Import Tables dialog box appears.

Use the Owner name field to restrict the objects retrieved.


When you import PowerExchange data maps, the Owner is the Schema Name of the data
map and the ODBC data source must have a DB Type of NRDB or NRDB2. When the
DB2 catalog is used for DB2/390 or DB2/400, the Owner is the owner of the DB2 tables
and the DB Type must be either DB2 or DB2400C.
If the Listener pointed to by the ODBC data source is running with PowerExchange
Security (either SECURITY=(1,x) or SECURITY=(2,x) in the PowerExchange
configuration file), then a valid userid and password must be provided.
The only difference between NRDB and NRDB2 is whether a three or two tier naming
conventions is used in the SQL statements to extract or load data. Non-relational sources
and targets mapped in PowerExchange can be referred to using either NRDB or NRDB2.
The format is as follows:
schema.mapname.table for NRDB

or
schema.mapname_table for NRDB2

200

Chapter 9: Working with Mappings

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 201 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

2.

Click Connect.

3.

Select the table you want to import.

4.

Hold down the Shift key to select blocks of tables.

Hold down the Ctrl key to make non-contiguous selections within a schema.

Click Select All to select all tables.

Click Select None to clear all highlighted selections.

Click OK.
The source or target definition appears.

5.

Click Repository > Save.

Working with Source and Target Definitions for PowerExchange Batch

201

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 202 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Working with Source Definitions for PowerExchange


Change or Real-time
With PowerExchange ODBC, you can create source definitions to access changed data for
VSAM datasets (including CICS/VSAM), and Adabas, Datacom, DB2, IDMS, IMS, MSSQL
Server, and Oracle databases.

Importing a Change Data Capture Source Definition


You initially create the source definitions in a similar way regardless of the database type.
When you have created the source or target definition, you can edit it.
The metadata that is imported for all change data sources is taken from the PowerExchange
extraction maps. Extraction maps are created by the PowerExchange Navigator when the
source is initially registered for Change Data Capture. These can be manually modified at a
later date.
To import a Change Data Capture Source Definition
1.

Click Sources > Import from Database in the Source Analyzer.


The Import Tables dialog box appears.

Use the Owner name field to restrict the objects retrieved.


When you import PowerExchange extraction maps the Owner is the first qualifier of the
extract map name. The entire extraction map name has the following format:
<D><N><instance>.<regname>_TABLENAME

202

Chapter 9: Working with Mappings

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 203 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

where:

D - the default entry starts with D (any user-modified maps start with U)

N - database-specific identifier (e.g., 1 for DB2/390, 2 for IMS, 3 for DB2/400, etc.)

instance - instance name chosen for the source registration

regname - the registration name chosen for the source registration.

For example, DB2/390 extraction map name might be: d1dsn7.testdb2_KJM723TB.


When you import Change Data Capture source definitions, the ODBC data source must
have a DB Type of CAPX or CAPXRT. These DB Types instruct the Listener to select
extraction maps rather than data maps.
If the Listener pointed to by the ODBC data source is running with PowerExchange
Security (either SECURITY=(1,x) or SECURITY=(2,x) in the DBMOVER
configuration), then a valid user name and password must be provided.
2.

Click Connect.

3.

Select the table you want to import.

4.

Hold down the Shift key to select blocks of tables.

Hold down the Ctrl key to make non-contiguous selections within a schema.

Click Select All to select all tables.

Click Select None to clear all highlighted selections.

Click OK.
The source definition appears.

5.

Click Repository > Save.

Working with Source Definitions for PowerExchange Change or Real-time

203

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 204 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

204

Chapter 9: Working with Mappings

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 205 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Chapter 10

Configuring Connections

This chapter includes the following topics:

Overview, 206

Working with Connections for PowerExchange ODBC, 207

205

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 206 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Overview
Before PowerCenter can access a source or target in a session, you must configure connections
in the Workflow Manager. When you create or modify a session that reads from or writes to a
database, you can select only configured source and target databases. Connections are saved in
the repository. For PowerExchange ODBC, you configure relational database connections.

206

Chapter 10: Configuring Connections

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 207 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Working with Connections for PowerExchange ODBC


This section describes the connection types used for extracting and loading data as well as
how to configure connection attributes.

Connection Types for Extracting Source Data


The connection you configure depends on the extraction mode. The type of source data you
want to extract does not affect the connection type although it will affect which ODBC data
source is used in the Connect String as there may be multiple different Listeners and
platform-specific parameters.
Table 10-1 describes the connections you create for data extraction based on the extraction
mode:
Table 10-1. Connection Types for Extracting Source Data

Extraction Mode

Application Connection/
Relational Database
Connection

Batch mode (non-relational data map)

Relational Connection

ODBC with NRDB and NRDB2 Data


Source

Batch mode (relational)

Relational Connection

ODBC with Data Source of


appropriate database type (DB2,
DB2400C, ADAUNLD, etc.)

Change mode

Relational Database Connection

ODBC with CAPX Data Source

Real-time mode

Relational Database Connection

ODBC with CAPXRT Data Source

Connection Type

Note: For more information about the full range of database types that can be specified in

ODBC Data Sources, see the PowerExchange Reference Manual.

Connection Types for Loading Target Data


All target connections are Relational Database Connection when loading data to
PowerExchange targets.
Table 10-2 describes the target database types and their capability:
Table 10-2. Target Database Types
Database Type (Access Method)

Insert

Update

Delete

Adabas

Yes

Yes

Yes

Datacom

No

No

No

DB2 (DB2)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Working with Connections for PowerExchange ODBC

207

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 208 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Database Type (Access Method)

Insert

Update

Delete

DB2 (DB2400C)

No

No

No

IDMS

No

No

No

IMS

Yes

Yes

Yes

Sequential (NRDB/NRDB2)

Yes

No

No

VSAM- KSDS (NRDB/NRDB2)

Yes

Yes

Yes

VSAM-ESDS (NRDB/NRDB2)

Yes

No

No

VSAM-RRDS (NRDB/NRDB2)

Yes

No

No

Configuring Attributes for Connections


When using ODBC connections, the majority of the attributes are specified in the ODBC
data source rather than in the connection in PowerCenter. For more information about
ODBC data sources, see the PowerExchange Reference Manual.
Source and target ODBC connections in Workflow Manager are defined as Relational
connections with a subtype of ODBC. The ODBC connection definition process is the same
for Batch, Change, and Real-Time. The only difference in these connections is the ODBC
data source to which they point.
Figure 10-1 shows the Connection Object Definition dialog box for an ODBC relational
connection:
Figure 10-1. ODBC - Connection Object Definition

208

Chapter 10: Configuring Connections

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 209 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Table 10-3 shows the Connection Object Definition dialog box for an ODBC relational
connection and describes the connection attributes to configure for an ODBC relational
database connection:
Table 10-3. ODBC Connection Object Definition Table
Connection
Attribute

Required/
Optional

Description

Name

Required

Name for the relational database connection.

User Name

Required

Username for the data source.

Password

Required

Password for the User Name.

Connect String

Required

Name of the ODBC data source.

Code Page

Required

Code page for the Integration Service to use to extract the data from the data
source.

Connection
Environment SQL

Optional

Executes an SQL command with each database connection. Default is disabled.

Transaction
Environment SQL

Optional

Executes an SQL command before the initiation of each transaction. Default is


disabled.

Connection Retry
Period

Optional

Number of seconds the Integration Service attempts to reconnect to the


database if the connection fails. If the Integration Service cannot connect to the
database in the retry period, the session fails.

Working with Connections for PowerExchange ODBC

209

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 210 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

210

Chapter 10: Configuring Connections

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 211 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Chapter 11

Working with Sessions

This chapter includes the following topics:

Working with WorkflowsOverview, 212

Extracting Data from PowerExchange in Batch Mode, 213

Extracting Data from PowerExchange in Change and Real-time Mode, 217

Loading Data to PowerExchange Targets, 219

211

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 212 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Working with WorkflowsOverview


After you create mappings in the PowerCenter Designer, you can create a session and use the
session in a workflow to extract, transform, and load data. You create sessions and workflows
in the Workflow Manager.
You can create a session in a workflow to extract data in batch, change, or real-time mode.
You determine how you want the Integration Service to extract the data when you configure
the session. You can also create a session to load data to a target.
After you configure the workflow, you must schedule the workflow. For more information
about creating, configuring, and scheduling workflows, see the PowerCenterWorkflow
Administration Guide.

Pipeline Partitioning
Depending on your source or target database, you can increase the number of partitions in a
pipeline to improve session performance. Increasing the number of partitions allows the
Integration Service to create multiple connections to sources and targets and process
partitions of data concurrently. While processing data, the Integration Service may process
data out of sequence due to the varying rates at which the partitions process data.
When you create a session in a workflow, the Workflow Manager validates each pipeline in
the mapping for partitioning. You can specify multiple partitions in a pipeline if the
Integration Service can maintain data consistency when it processes the partitioned data.
For more information about partitioning and a list of all partitioning restrictions, see the
PowerCenterWorkflow Administration Guide.

Partition Types for Extracting Source Data


If you are configuring a session to read source data, you can use partitioning if the session
mode is batch.
Table 11-1 describes the partition types for partitioning points when extracting source data in
batch mode:
Table 11-1. Partition Types for Partitioning Points for Sources
Source Type

Partitioning Point

Partition Type

Non-relational

Application Multi-Group Source Qualifier

Pass-through

Relational

Source Qualifier

Key range
Pass-through

Partition Types for Loading Target Data


If you are configuring a session to write data to DB2/390 and DB2/400 targets, you can
specify all partition types.

212

Chapter 11: Working with Sessions

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 213 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Extracting Data from PowerExchange in Batch Mode


To extract data in batch mode, you must select the appropriate ODBC relational connection
and configure session properties. The connection you select and the session properties you
configure differ depending on the type of source data.

Session Properties for Non-Relational Batch Mode Sessions


The relational connection for non-relational sources should point to an ODBC data source
that has a DBType of either NRDB or NRDB2. You should use a connection with the same
DBType as used when the source was imported. That is, if you imported the source mapping
using NRDB, then use an NRDB ODBC connection in the session connection as opposed to
an NRDB2.
Note: The only difference between NRDB and NRDB2 is whether a three or two tier naming

conventions is used in the SQL statements to extract or load data. Non-relational sources and
targets mapped in PowerExchange can be referred to using either NRDB or NRDB2. The
format is as follows:

NRDB: schema.datamapname.table

NRDB2: schema.datamapname_table

Extracting Data from PowerExchange in Batch Mode

213

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 214 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

To configure a batch mode session for non-relational sources:


1.

In the Task Developer, double-click a session with a non-relational source to open the
session properties.

2.

Click the Sources view on the Mapping tab.

3.

In the Reader field of the Readers settings, Relational Reader is automatically selected.

4.

In the Connections Value field, select the non-relational ODBC connection (NRDB or
NRDB2).

5.

In the Properties settings, configure the Owner Name attribute. For more information
about other Properties attributes, see the PowerCenter Workflow Administration Guide.
At minimum, the schema name of the PowerExchange data map (or the Owner name
displayed when the source mapping is edited) must be specified in order to correct
construct the SQL statement during execution. PowerExchange SQL Escape Sequences
can also be specified in this attribute field to override specifications in the data map. For
a complete list of the SQL Escape Sequences available, see the PowerExchange Reference
Manual.
The following example indicates how the Owner Name attribute can be configured to
provide the schema name for the source (seq) as well as an override for the physical file
name in the data map (dtldsn=new.dataset.name):
seq{dtldsn=new.dataset.name}

214

Chapter 11: Working with Sessions

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 215 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Note: SQL escape sequences and the Owner Name can be specified in any order in the
attribute field.
6.

Click OK.

Session Properties for Relational Batch Mode Sessions


To extract data from a relational source in batch mode, you must select the appropriate
ODBC relational connection and configure session properties. The relational connection
should point to an ODBC data source that has the DBType of the source (DB2, DB2400C,
DB2UDB, MSSQL or Oracle). You can then configure the session properties as you would
any other PowerExchange ODBC source.
To configure a batch mode session for relational sources:
1.

In the Task Developer, double-click a session with a relational source to open the session
properties.
Click the Sources view on the Mapping tab.

2.

In the Reader field of the Readers settings, Relational Reader is selected.

3.

In the Connections Value field, select the appropriate relational ODBC connection.

4.

In the Properties settings, configure the Owner Name attribute. For more information
about other Properties attributes, see the PowerCenter Workflow Administration Guide.

Extracting Data from PowerExchange in Batch Mode

215

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 216 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

At minimum, the owner name of the source table must be specified in order to correct
construct the SQL statement during execution. Alternatively, the Owner Name can be
specified in the source mapping and, if done, would not be required here.
5.

216

Click OK.

Chapter 11: Working with Sessions

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 217 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Extracting Data from PowerExchange in Change and


Real-time Mode
To extract data in change and real-time mode, you must select an ODBC relational
connection and configure session properties. The connection you select for change mode
should refer to an ODBC data source with a DBType of CAPX whereas a real-time mode
connection should refer to an ODBC data source with a DBType of CAPXRT.
When using ODBC to extract data from PowerExchange in either Change or Real-Time
mode, restart is handled from within PowerExchange.

Session Properties for Change and Real-time Mode Sessions


Use the following procedure to configure a session for change or real-time mode.
To configure a change or real-time mode session:
1.

In the Task Developer, double-click a session with a relational source to open the session
properties.

2.

Click the Sources view on the Mapping tab.

3.

In the Reader field of the Readers settings, Relational Reader is automatically selected.

Extracting Data from PowerExchange in Change and Real-time Mode

217

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 218 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

4.

In the Connections Value field, select a connection which points to an ODBC data
source with DBType CAPX (for Change) or CAPXRT (for Real-Time) and the
appropriate Location value.

5.

In the Properties settings, configure the Owner Name attribute. For more information
about other Properties attributes, see the PowerCenter Workflow Administration Guide.
At minimum, the schema name of the source extraction map must be specified in order
to correct construct the SQL statement during execution. This name is the first qualifier
of extraction map name shown in the PowerExchange Navigator. It can also be
determined by checking the Owner Name in the source mapping. PowerExchange SQL
Escape Sequences can also be specified in this attribute field to override specifications in
the data map. For a complete list of the SQL Escape Sequences available, see the
PowerExchange Reference Manual.
The following example indicates the manner in which the Owner Name attribute can be
configured to provide the schema name for the source (d6vsam) as well as an override for
the application name specified in the DBQual2/Application Name field in the ODBC
data source (dtlapp=new_appname):
{dtlapp=new_appname}d6vsam

Note: SQL escape sequences and the Owner Name can be specified in any order in the
attribute field.
6.

218

Click OK.

Chapter 11: Working with Sessions

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 219 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Loading Data to PowerExchange Targets


To load data to a PowerExchange target, you must select a relational database connection.
Then configure properties for the session as you would any other relational target. For more
information about configuring sessions for relational sources, see the PowerCenter Workflow
Administration Guide.
To configure a session to load data to a PowerExchange target:
1.

In the Task Developer, double-click a session with a relational source to open the session
properties.

2.

Click the Targets view on the Mapping tab.

3.

In the Writers settings, ensure that Relational Writer is selected.

4.

In the Connections Value field, select a connection which points to an ODBC data
source with appropriate DBType and Location value.

5.

In the Properties settings, configure the Table Name Prefix attribute.


At minimum, the schema name of the target table (if relational) or the PowerExchange
data map (if non-relational) must be specified in order to correct construct the SQL
statement during execution.

6.

Click OK.

Loading Data to PowerExchange Targets

219

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 220 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

220

Chapter 11: Working with Sessions

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 221 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Chapter 12

PowerExchange Restart
and Recovery
This chapter includes the following topics:

Overview, 222

Restart and Recovery Using PowerExchange ODBC, 223

221

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 222 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Overview
Recovery and restart need to be considered when designing and configuring sessions and
workflows using either PowerExchange Change or Real-Time. The considerations differ
depending upon whether the session uses PowerExchange Client for PowerCenter (PWXPC)
or PowerExchange ODBC. This is primarily due to the differences in where the restart
information is maintained.
With PowerExchange ODBC, the restart information is controlled and maintained on the
PowerExchange Listener platform in the internal change information file (CDEP) using the
application name specified in the connection.

222

Chapter 12: PowerExchange Restart and Recovery

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 223 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Restart and Recovery Using PowerExchange ODBC


PowerExchange ODBC uses the restart tokens associated with application names in the
CDEP file to determine the starting extraction point for a session. The CDEP file used is the
one maintained by PowerExchange on the platform targeted by the extraction. The CDEP
file contains both begin and end restart tokens for each extraction. This differs from PWXPC
where only the end restart tokens are maintained in the restart token file.
The restart tokens determine the baseline point from which to extract the changed data for
the source database. Since both start and end restart tokens are available when using ODBC,
the extraction type decides which ones will be used for restart. The extraction type is specified
in the ODBC connection in the CAPXTYPE parameter. This can be overridden at the session
level by using the SQL Escape Sequence DTLXTYPE. For more information about ODBC
parameters and SQL Escape Sequences see the PowerExchange Reference Manual.
If the extraction type specified is Since Last (SL) then the extraction will commence at the last
successful ending point. If it is Restart (RS) then it will commence at the starting point of
either the last successful extraction that was run or the one that is specified with the Reset
Start Point in the extraction application dialog box in the PowerExchange Navigator.
Note: Unique application names should be used for each for each session to prevent any

conflict in the CDEP between multiple sessions.


The CDEP information for an extraction is only updated when a session ends successfully.
Failed sessions do not update the restart token information in the CDEP with the progress so
far.
Warning: Failed sessions that are restarted will extract data from the last successful session
(based on CAPXTYPE specified). This means that there is the possibility that duplicated
changes will be sent to the target. In the event of a failure, you must either restore the targets
to match the restart point prior to restarting the session or design your PowerCenter session
to handle the possibility of duplicate records.

Managing Restart Tokens Using PowerExchange ODBC


PowerExchange on the source platform reads the restart tokens from the CDEP for each
source included in the session. The first time a session is run with a new application name, an
entry for it will be automatically created in the CDEP if it does not already exist.
If the application name already exists in the CDEP, PowerExchange will use the appropriate
restart tokens to commence extraction from the change stream. Which restart tokens are used
depends upon the extraction type (SL or RS) and whether new tokens have been supplied by
DTLUAPPL since the last run. If new tokens have been supplied by DTLUAPPL, then those
tokens will be used regardless of the extraction type.
If there are sources included that have newer restart points, they will not be provided any
records from the change stream until their restart points have been reached. This prevents
sources from being passed records that they processed in the previous extraction run.

Restart and Recovery Using PowerExchange ODBC

223

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 224 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

After a session completes successfully, PowerExchange updates the CDEP with the ending
restart tokens.

CDEP Restart Tokens Example


The following example shows the contents of restart tokens in the CDEP for an application
that contains a restart token file for the DB2 sources DB2DEMO1, DB2DEMO2, and
DB2DEMO3:
Application name=<odbc_db2demo13ac> Rsttkn=<3> Ainseq=<0> Preconfig=< >
FirstTkn =<D2D1D4D340400000003ED5D600000000>
LastTkn
=<D2D1D4D340400000003ED5D600000000>
CurrentTkn=<>
Registration name=<db2demo1.1> tag=<DB2DSN7db2demo11>
Sequence=<000007337D8A00000000000007337D8A00000000>
Restart =<D2D1D4D34040000007337D0200000000>
Registration name=<db2demo2.1> tag=<DB2DSN7db2demo21>
Sequence=<000007337D8A00000000000007337D8A00000000>
Restart =<D2D1D4D34040000007337D0200000000>
Registration name=<db2demo3.1> tag=<DB2DSN7db2demo31>
Sequence=<000007337D8A00000000000007337D8A00000000>
Restart =<D2D1D4D34040000007337D0200000000>

The application name odbc_db2demo13ac was created using DTLUAPPL with RSTTKN
GENERATE. An example of the control cards that were used is given below:
mod

APPL odbc_db2demo13ac DSN7 RSTTKN GENERATE


add rsttkn db2demo1
add rsttkn db2demo2
add rsttkn db2demo3
end APPL odbc_db2demo13ac
print appl odbc_db2demo13ac

You can use either ADD APPL or MOD APPL for a new application name as with MOD
APPL DTLUAPPL will create the application name if it does not already exist.
After the new restart tokens are provided through DTLUAPPL, the session using this
application name can be started and it will use this restart tokens.

224

Chapter 12: PowerExchange Restart and Recovery

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 225 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Part 4: Appendices

This part contains the following appendices:

Tips, 227

Datatypes and Code Pages, 239

Troubleshooting, 247

225

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 226 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

226

Part 4: Appendices

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 227 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Appendix A

Tips

This appendix provides details about the following:

Organizing Sources by Map Type in Designer, 228

Filtering Source Data Using PWXPC, 230

Using DTLREXE to Submit MVS Batch Jobs, 233

Creating Sequential and GDG Data Sets, 236

227

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 228 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Organizing Sources by Map Type in Designer


Source metadata imported in Source Analyzer in the PowerCenter Designer using PWXPC is
stored into sub-folders based on source type and location. The user cannot choose the subfolder name and the table names within those sub-folders must be unique.
With the PWXPC Import from PowerExchange dialog box, these folder names have the
following format: <source_type_location>. The source_type value equates to the Source Type
specified in the Import from PowerExchange dialog box. The location value equates to the
Location specified in the Import from PowerExchange dialog box and is a user-specified name
in the PowerExchange dbmover.cfg file.
For example, if the Location is MVS2 and the Source Type is IMS, then the folder will be
called IMS_MVS2. All IMS sources imported from that location will be stored into that
folder. You can use the name you assign for the location as a method of organizing your
source metadata in Designer.
There are some non-relational source types where the schema name is different but map name
can be the same for both PowerExchange data map and extraction map (CDC Datamap)
created from that data map.
To illustrate, lets assume the following are used to create the PowerExchange data map for an
IMS database:

The IMS database is called IMS1T01 and this is used as the PowerExhange Data Map
Name

A segment in that database results in a table in the data map called IMSSEG1

The PowerExchange Schema Name used when creating the data map is IMS

The PowerExchange map name (in the NRDB2 form) is constructed as follows:
<schema_name>.<datamap_name>_<table_name>

In this example, the PowerEchange data map name is IMS.IMS1T01_IMSSEG1. If you use
the IMS database name for the Capture Registration Name as well, the resulting extraction
map name will be d2reconid.IMS1T01_IMSSEG1.
The map name for both the data map and extraction map are the same. Since the schema
name is not used in the source definition table name, the names will be exactly the same when
imported in Designer. As a result, only one will be able to be imported from the same
Location. So, there are two choices:
1.

Use a different name for the capture registration so that a unique extraction map name is
created.

2.

Use a different Location name to import data maps and extraction maps

If you want to use the same names for both the data map name and the capture registration
name, then you will need to use a different location name in the Import from PowerExchange
to place these two source definitions in different folders.
To help organize sources in Designer, use location names in the PowerExchange dbmover.cfg
that indicate the type of data you are retrieving. Creating multiple NODE= statements
228

Appendix A: Tips

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 229 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

(location names) for the same listener is perfectly acceptable. In this example, if you create a
NODE called CDCMAPS in the dbmover.cfg and use this as the Location when importing
the IMS extraction map, it will be stored in a sub- folder called IMS_CDCMAPS.
This strategy of separating extraction maps from regular relational and non-relational source
metadata can be a useful way of organizing source metadata in Designer.

Organizing Sources by Map Type in Designer

229

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 230 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Filtering Source Data Using PWXPC


Using PWXPC, it is possible to filter data at the source so only the relevant rows are sent
from PowerExchange to the PowerCenter session. There are many reasons why you might
want to do this. Some examples of scenarios in which this capability is useful are:

With some source types you cannot limit change capture changes based on only certain
columns changing (e.g., VSAM and IMS).

It is possible, for certain source types, to create capture registrations in PowerExchange


which only register specific columns (as opposed to all of them). However, if the RDBMS
logs are used directly for extraction and they does not support this selective column
capture, then the row will be extracted even if none of the columns of interest have
changed (e.g., DB2/400).

The source type is one where either PowerExchange itself or the RDBMS will only capture
changes based on columns of interest. However, additional or all columns are registered
for capture because other extractions require them.

You only want to extract columns with a specific value. For example, you want to read all
of the columns in a table for a specific customer.

In these types of cases, you can use the source Filter Override attribute in the Session
Properties to filter the source data. This can be done with sources using a PWXPC Batch,
Change, and Real-Time connection. The filters specified are then included in the WHERE
clause sent to PowerExchange. Proper SQL syntax should be followed for these overrides to
prevent SQL failures.
The SQL filter specified can specify any type of column that exists in the source mapping.
This includes regular data columns and PowerExchange-generated columns such as
DTL__CAPX columns, change indicator columns (DTL__CI) and before image columns
(DTL__BI).
There are two forms of the filter syntax. The simplest form is for single record sources such as
CDC data maps, relational tables, or single record non-relational data maps:
<filter condition1>;<filter condition2>;...

For multi-record non-relational data map sources, there is a more complex form of the syntax:
<group name1>=<filter condition1>;<group name2>=<filter condition2>;...

This more complex form of the syntax allows you to use different filters for different record
types or the same filter for only some of the record types in a multi-record source. You can
also use the simple form with multi-record source data maps which then causes that filter to
be applied to all records.

230

Appendix A: Tips

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 231 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

The following example shows how to use the PowerExchange Change indicator columns
(DTL__CI_column) to filter changed data specifically, the change indicator for the
ACCOUNT field which is called DTL__CI_ACCOUNT:
Figure A-1. Filter Overrides: Single-Record Filter

In the following example, the multi-record VSAM source contains four records which each
have unique field names. The group names for the four records are:
V07A_RECORD_LAYOUT, V07B_RECORD_LAYOUT, V07C_RECORD_LAYOUT,
and V07D_RECORD_LAYOUT. The filter contains the group-name filter syntax in order
to filter data records for the first two records. No filtering is done on the other two records.
The filter specified is in the Filter Overrides attribute is:
V07A_RECORD_LAYOUT=V07A_RECORD_KEY=1;V07B_RECORD_LAYOUT=V07B_RECORD_KEY=2

Because there are four records in the multi-record data, there will be four SELECT statements
created by PWXPC. The SELECT statements for the two records specified in the Filter
Overrides attribute will also have WHERE clauses for their specific filters.

Filtering Source Data Using PWXPC

231

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 232 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

The Mapping tab for this example is as follows:


Figure A-2. Filter Overrides: Multi-Record Filter

Records for V07A_RECORD_LAYOUT and V07B_RECORD_LAYOUT will be filtered


whereas the other two records in the file will not be.

232

Appendix A: Tips

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 233 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Using DTLREXE to Submit MVS Batch Jobs


PowerExchange provides a utility program called DTLREXE which can be used to cause
remote execution of a program on another platform running PowerExchange. One option of
this utility is the SUBMIT option which provides the ability to submit a MVS batch job
remotely. For detailed information on the syntax of the DTLREXE utility PROG=SUBMIT
statements, see the PowerExchange Utilities Guide.
This utility can be invoked in PowerCenter workflows using PowerCenter Command Tasks.
Command tasks can either be stand-alone tasks or pre/post session commands. Which you
choose depends upon what you want to do. There are advantages in using a stand-alone
command task for repeatable functions as it only needs to be coded once and can then be used
by numerous workflows. On the other hand, it is possible to easily configure a session to fail
if a pre-session command task fails. For more information about commands tasks and preand post-session commands, see the PowerCenter Workflow Administration Guide.
Some examples of the type of tasks that can be performed using DTLREXE PROG=SUBMIT
are:

Truncate a database table prior to loading data into it in a session. This is useful for
database types for which PowerCenter does not support truncate, such as Adabas.

Notify a MVS-based job scheduler that the workflow is starting or ending. Some job
schedulers provide batch posting utilities and they can be utilized using DTLREXE to
submit a batch job.

Unload a database to a flat file so it can then be used in a session to load another database.

Clean up DB2 bulk load files when the session completes successfully.

Submit any type of MBS Batch JOB for which waiting for the completion and returning a
set of messages is required.

Using DTLREXE to Submit MVS Batch Jobs

233

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 234 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

The following example shows how to setup a DTLREXE PROG=SUBMIT command as a


pre-session command:
Figure A-3. Pre-Session Command - DTLREXE

In this example, the DTLREXE command specifies mode=(job,wait) which means that the
DTLREXE will wait for the job to complete. This, in turn, will cause the session to wait until
this pre-session command completes. In the Error Handling section of the Config Object,
you can specify how to handle errors for pre-session commands in the On Pre-session command
task error field.
Note: Ensure that the JOB submitted through DTLREXE includes the appropriate DTLNTS

steps if WAIT mode is requested. The PowerExchange RUNLIB, in member DTLREXE,


contains sample JCL to be used with DTLREXE that includes the required DTLNTS steps.
If you are using a stand-alone command task to submit a batch JOB using DTLREXE, then
there are no session configuration options to check for success or failure. If you want to test
the status of the command task in the following session, you will need to use one of the taskspecific workflow variables available in the Workflow Manager; that is, either PrevTaskStatus

234

Appendix A: Tips

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 235 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

or Status. These variables can be used in link conditions to test the status of tasks in a
workflow. For example:
Figure A-4. Workflow Link Condition - DTLREXE
Link Condition

The link condition is created by double-clicking on the link between the DTLREXE
command task and the s_bulk_db2demo123_db2demoabc session to which it is connected.
This will invoke the Expression Editor which allows you to add the test to ensure that the
DTLREXE command task succeeded, as shown below:
Figure A-5. Command Task Expression Editor - DTLREXE

For additional information on link conditions and the expression editor, see the PowerCenter
Workflow Administration Guide.

Using DTLREXE to Submit MVS Batch Jobs

235

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 236 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Creating Sequential and GDG Data Sets


When writing to a sequential or Generation Data Group (GDG) data set using
PowerExchange, the data set is created when the first record to be written is received. If there
is no data written to the target, then PowerExchange will not created the new data set.
Some applications require that a new sequential data set or generation of a GDG data set be
created each time a session or workflow runs, even if that data set is empty. If you are using
sequential or GDG data sets on MVS with PowerExchange and have this requirement, you
can ensure that a new generation is created each time you run a session (task) in a workflow
by following the procedure below.
To pre-allocate a sequential or GDG data set in a session:
1.

In Workflow Manager, right-click on the appropriate task in either Task Developer or in


your workflow in Workflow Designer.

2.

Select Tasks > Edit. The Edit Tasks dialog box is displayed.

3.

Select the Mappings tab.

4.

In the Pre SQL attribute in the Session Level Properties for the target, enter the
following:
<CMD>CREATEFILE FN=data_set_name
If this is a GDG data set, then the data_set_name should be gdg_base_name(+1) to create
a new generation.

5.

236

Click OK.

Appendix A: Tips

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 237 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

The following example show a CREATEFILE command for a new generation of GDG data
set my.gdg:
Figure A-6. Session Mapping Tab - File Create Pre-SQL Command

Note: When using this procedure for GDG data sets, the GDG base name specified must exist

and GDGLOCATE=Y must be specified in your PowerExchange DBMOVER configuration


file on the MVS platform.
When you run the workflow, the new generation of the GDG is created in addition to the
normal processing of the workflow. The allocation parameters used to create the data set are
specified in the DBMOVER configuration used by the PowerExchange Listener.

Creating Sequential and GDG Data Sets

237

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 238 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

The CREATEFILE command has a number of parameters. Any number of these can be
specified. The parameters and their values are separated with a space in the command. The
parameters are:
Parameter

Platform

Description

FN

All

File name to be created. If specifying a relative GDG data set


name, the file name must be in double quotes ().
This parameter is required.

UID

MVS / AS400 only

Userid. This parameter is required if your Listener is running with


user security (SECURITY=1 or 2).

PWD

MVS / AS400 only

Password for the userid specified in UID.

EPWD

MVS / AS400 only

Encrypted password for the userid specified in UID. Only one of


PWD or EPWD is required.

MODELDCB

MVS only

Model DSCB to be used for the file creation. Generally, this is only
required for GDG data sets which are not SMS-managed.

SPACE

MVS only

Space allocation parameters in the format:


SPACE=(u,p,s)
where:
- u is units (T for tracks and C for cylinders)
- p is primary space allocation value
- s is secondary space allocation value

BS

MVS only

Block size.

RELEASE

MVS only

Release unused allocated space on CLOSE.


Valid value is Y.

VOLSER

MVS only

Volume serial.

UNIT

MVS only

Unit type.

LRECL

MVS, AS400 only

Logical record length.

RECFM

MVS, AS400

Record format.

These value override the equivalent parameters specified in the DBMOVER configuration
file. Any values not specified use either those specified in DBMOVER or the standard
PowerExchange defaults. See the PowerExchange Reference Manual for further information
on these parameters.

238

Appendix A: Tips

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 239 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Appendix B

Datatypes and Code


Pages
This appendix covers the following topics:

Datatype ReferenceOverview, 240

PowerExchange and Transformation Datatypes, 241

Relational Datatypes, 243

Reading and Writing Binary Data in PowerExchange Client for PowerCenter, 244

Using Code Pages, 245

239

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 240 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Datatype ReferenceOverview
PowerCenter uses the following datatypes when reading source data, transforming the data,
and writing target data:

Native datatypes. Specific to the source and target databases or PowerExchange. Native
datatypes appear in source and target definitions.

Transformation datatypes. Generic datatypes that appear in transformations. The


Integration Service uses the datatypes to move data across platforms.

For more information about transformation datatypes, see the PowerCenter Designer Guide.

240

Appendix B: Datatypes and Code Pages

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 241 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

PowerExchange and Transformation Datatypes


PowerExchange datatypes display for non-relational source definitions. You import nonrelational source definitions from a PowerExchange data map. The datatypes of the fields in
the source definition match the datatype for the corresponding field in the data map. These
datatypes map to PowerCenter transformation datatypes, which display in the Application
Multi-Group Source Qualifier for the non-relational source and other transformations in a
mapping.
For information about how native non-relational database datatypes map to PowerExchange
datatypes, see the PowerExchange documentation.
Table B-1 compares PowerExchange datatypes and the transformation datatypes that display
in the Application Multi-Group Source Qualifier transformation:
Table B-1. PowerExchange and Transformation Datatypes
PowerExchange

Precision

Transformation

Range

BIN

10

Binary

1 to 104,857,600 bytes
You can pass binary data from a source to a target, but you
cannot perform transformations on binary data.
PowerCenter does not support binary data for COBOL or
flat file sources.

CHAR

10

String

1 to 104,857,600 characters
Fixed-length or varying-length string.

DATE

10

Date/Time

Jan 1, 1753 AD to Dec 31, 9999 AD


Combined date/time value, with precision to the
nanosecond.

DOUBLE

18

Double

Precision of 15 digits
Double-precision floating-point numeric value.

FLOAT

Double

Precision of 15 digits
Double-precision floating-point numeric value.

NUM8

Small Integer

Precision of 5 and scale of 0


Integer value.

NUM8U

Small Integer

Precision of 5 and scale of 0


Integer value.

NUM16

Small Integer

Precision of 5 and scale of 0


Integer value.

NUM16U

Integer

Precision of 10 and scale of 0


Integer value.

NUM32

10

Integer

Precision of 10 and scale of 0


Integer value.

NUM32U

10

Double

Precision of 15 digits
Double-precision floating-point numeric value.

PowerExchange and Transformation Datatypes

241

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 242 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Table B-1. PowerExchange and Transformation Datatypes


PowerExchange

Precision

Transformation

Range

NUM64

19

Decimal

Precision 1 to 28 digits, scale 0 to 28


Decimal value with declared precision and scale. Scale
must be less than or equal to precision. If you pass a value
with negative scale or declared precision greater than 28,
the PowerCenter Server converts it to a double.

NUM64U

19

Decimal

Precision 1 to 28 digits, scale 0 to 28


Decimal value with declared precision and scale. Scale
must be less than or equal to precision. If you pass a value
with negative scale or declared precision greater than 28,
the PowerCenter Server converts it to a double.

String

1 to 104,857,600 characters
Fixed-length or varying-length string.

NUMCHAR

242

PACKED

15

Decimal

Precision 1 to 28 digits, scale 0 to 28


Decimal value with declared precision and scale. Scale
must be less than or equal to precision. If you pass a value
with negative scale or declared precision greater than 28,
the PowerCenter Server converts it to a double.

TIME

Date/Time

Jan 1, 1753 AD to Dec 31, 9999 AD


Combined date/time value, with precision to the
nanosecond.

TIMESTAMP

Date/Time

Jan 1, 1753 AD to Dec 31, 9999 AD


Combined date/time value, with precision to the
nanosecond.

UPACKED

15

Decimal

Precision 1 to 28 digits, scale 0 to 28


Decimal value with declared precision and scale. Scale
must be less than or equal to precision. If you pass a value
with negative scale or declared precision greater than 28,
the PowerCenter Server converts it to a double.

UZONED

15

Decimal

Precision 1 to 28 digits, scale 0 to 28


Decimal value with declared precision and scale. Scale
must be less than or equal to precision. If you pass a value
with negative scale or declared precision greater than 28,
the PowerCenter Server converts it to a double.

VARBIN

10

Binary

1 to 104,857,600 bytes
You can pass binary data from a source to a target, but you
cannot perform transformations on binary data.
PowerCenter does not support binary data for COBOL or
flat file sources.

VARCHAR

10

String

1 to 104,857,600 characters
Fixed-length or varying-length string.

ZONED

15

Decimal

Precision 1 to 28 digits, scale 0 to 28


Decimal value with declared precision and scale. Scale
must be less than or equal to precision. If you pass a value
with negative scale or declared precision greater than 28,
the PowerCenter Server converts it to a double.

Appendix B: Datatypes and Code Pages

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 243 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Relational Datatypes
PowerExchange Client for PowerCenter supports the same datatypes for DB2/390, DB2/400,
and DB2/UDB that PowerCenter supports for DB2. It also supports the same Oracle and the
same SQL Server datatypes that PowerCenter supports. For more information about
PowerCenter datatypes, see the PowerCenter Designer Guide.

Relational Datatypes

243

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 244 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Reading and Writing Binary Data in PowerExchange


Client for PowerCenter
If you read binary data from any source, or if you write binary data to a DB2/390 or DB2/
400 target using PowerExchange Client for PowerCenter, the data cannot be larger than 32
KB. Otherwise, the Integration Service truncates the data.

244

Appendix B: Datatypes and Code Pages

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 245 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Using Code Pages


When you configure a connection object in the Workflow Manager, select a code page for the
connection.
If you configure the Integration Service for code page validation, the source code page must
be a code page that is a subset of the target code page.
If you configure the Integration Service for relaxed code page validation this is not the case.
You can select any code page supported by PowerCenter for the target.
For more information about configuring the code page in connection objects, see Table 4-11
on page 104 which describes the connection attributes you configure for Oracle real-time
mode application connections.
For more information about code pages, see the PowerCenter Administrator Guide.

Using Code Pages

245

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 246 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

246

Appendix B: Datatypes and Code Pages

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 247 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Appendix C

Troubleshooting

This chapter includes the following topics:

Troubleshooting, 248

247

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 248 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Troubleshooting
When I go into Designer, I get messages about failures to load DLLs.
This can happen when PowerExchange Client for PowerCenter plug-ins are installed but
cannot be loaded for various reasons like incorrect releases of PowerExchange installed or
PATH problems. For more information, see KnowledgeBase Article # 15346.
I want to import a DB2/400 source definition, but need to determine the name of the DB2/400
database on the AS/400 machine.
Use the AS400 DSPRDBDIRE command to see a list of databases on the AS/400 machine.
The session failed with an error stating that the PowerExchange message repository cannot be
loaded.
You can receive this error on UNIX when there is no PWX_HOME environment variable set
to the PowerExchange installation directory. Set the PWX_HOME environment variable to
the PowerExchange installation directory.
I set the Idle Time session condition to -1. However, the session completed with the following
message: Idle Time limit is reached.
This can occur if EOF=Y is specified in the PowerExchange configuration file (dbmover.cfg)
CAPI_CONNECTION statement. When you set EOF=Y, PowerExchange returns an EOF
(which stops the session) when it reaches the end of the change stream as determined at the
time the session starts reading from it. As a result, the PowerCenter session completes instead
of continuing to run.
This message can also occur if the connection with PowerExchange is stopped using the
PowerExchange STOPTASK command.
My session seems to be processing the pipelines serially.
The Integration Service may be configured to process master and detail pipelines sequentially
as it did in versions prior to 7.0. As a result, it reads data from each source in change and realtime modes sequentially.
Clear the PMServer 6.X Joiner Source Order Compatibility option on the Compatibility and
Database tab in the Informatica Server Setup. When you rerun the session, the Integration
Service will process pipelines concurrently.
The session failed with a plug-in error:
MAPPING> SDKS_38007 Error occurred during [initializing] reader plug-in
#30nnnn.

This is a generic message indicating the PWXPC encountered an error. Review the session log
for other messages indicating what the problem is. If there are no other error messages in the
session log, check the PowerExchange logs on both the Integration Service platform and the
Listener platform.

248

Appendix C: Troubleshooting

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 249 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

I want to read all of the changes I have captured and have them be inserts into a staging area. How
do I do this?
When using PowerExchange ODBC to read captured changes, INSERT is the default
operation. If you want to apply the changes to the target using the same operation as done on
the source (INSERT, UPDATE, or DELETE), you need to explicitly include an Update
Strategy transformation in the mapping to make this happen by testing the
DTL__CAPXACTION field. In the Update Strategy Expression field, you would code:
DECODE(DTL__CAPXACTION,'I',DD_INSERT,'U',DD_UPDATE,'D',DD_DELETE,DD_REJECT)

When using PWXPC, the DTL__CAPXACTION field is automatically acted upon when
processing changed data. If you want to have all changes processed as INSERTs regardless of
the DTL__CAPXACTION field, you must code an update strategy specifying DD_INSERT
in the Update Strategy Expression field.

Troubleshooting

249

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 250 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

250

Appendix C: Troubleshooting

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 251 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Index

A
access method
CAPX 7
CAPXRT 7, 8
Application Multi-Group Source Qualifiers
See source qualifiers
application name
restart points 117, 167

B
batch extraction mode
PowerExchange Condense 7
batch mode
configuring sessions 129
Before image
Flexible transactions 184
Bulk Load (property)
configuring 87

C
CAPX
access method 7
CAPXRT
access method 7, 8

CBLO
See constraint-based loading
CDC data
group source 8, 72
CDC data map
extraction map 163
See also extraction map source definitions
CDC sessions
adding source 171
recovery example 174
removing source 171
restart 117, 151, 165
restart token file 162
stopping 116, 117, 170
CDEP
restart 167
change data capture
See change mode
See also real-time mode
Change Indicator
Flexible transactions 184
change mode
configuring connections 117
configuring sessions 135
code pages
See also PowerCenter Installation and Configuration
Guide
configuring 245
supported code pages 245

251

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 252 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

compression
configuring 108
Condense
UOW Cleanser 7, 8
configuring
code pages 245
compression 108
connections 83
encryption 108
pacing size 109
sessions 128, 212
workflows 128, 212
connections
configuring 83
list by source type 80
list by target type 81
constraint-based loading
description 136
FullCBLOSupport 136
continuous extraction mode
PowerExchange Condense 7
creating
DB2 source definitions 25
DB2 target definitions 25
IMS source definitions 43
Oracle source definitions 33
source qualifiers 75
Sybase source definitions 37
VSAM source definitions 43
custom property
FullCBLOSupport 136

D
data maps
non-relational source definitions 43
viewing in the source definition 52
Datacom
batch mode application connections 92
change mode application connections 93
datatypes
DB2/390 243
DB2/400 243
overview 240
PowerExchange 241
transformation 241
transformation datatypes in source qualifiers 75
DB2
creating source definitions 25
creating target definitions 25

252

Index

DB2/390
change mode application connections 89
configuring bulk load properties 87
connection types 80, 81
datatypes 243
real-time mode application connections 89
DB2/400
change mode application connections 89
connection types 80, 81
datatypes 243
real-time mode application connections 89
default
restart points 157
DTL__CAPXACTION
in CDC sessions 42, 54
in extraction maps 62
DTL__CAPXRESTART1
restart value 163
DTL__CAPXRESTART2
restart value 163
DTLUAPPL 167
example 168
restart 163
DTLUTSK utility 116
description 170

E
editing
Source Qualifier transformations 75
encryption
configuring 108
enhanced restart
recovery processing 173
environment SQL
See also PowerCenter Workflow Administration Guide
configuring
extraction map
CDC data map 135
extraction map source definitions
editing 62
viewing 60

F
filelist
description 129
flexible key transformations
group source 187

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 253 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

Flexible Target Key


Custom transformations 178

G
group source
CDC data 8, 72, 187
description 71
flexible key transformations 187
multiple records 6, 71
sequential 6, 71
VSAM 6, 71

I
idle time
description 115
Idle Time (property)
configuring for a PWXPC session 115
IDMS
batch mode application connections 92
change mode application connections 93
IMS
batch mode application connections 92
change mode application connections 93
connection types 80
datatypes 241
real-time mode application connections 93

L
loading
constraints 136
logger token
restart value 163

M
metadata extensions
editing 54
viewing 53
viewing for non-relational source definitions 61

N
non-relational source definitions
editing 54
editing metadata extensions 54
viewing data map details 52

viewing metadata extensions 61


non-relational sources
configuring batch mode sessions 129
non-relational target definitions
editing 54
editing metadata extensions 54

O
Oracle
connection types 80
creating source definitions 33
real-time application connections 99, 104

P
pacing size
configuring 109
pipeline partitioning
See also PowerCenter Workflow Administration Guide
batch mode 212
description 128, 212
loading to targets 212
$PMRootDir
Cache 90, 94, 100, 105
Restart 89, 93, 99, 104, 118, 154
PowerExchange
performance 109
PowerExchange Change Data Capture
Flexible transformations 182
PowerExchange Condense
batch extraction mode 7
continuous extraction mode 7
PowerExchange Configuration File
dbmover.cfg 18

R
reader time limit
description for PWXPC 90
Reader Time Limit (property)
configuring for a PWXPC session 90, 94
real-time flush latency
description for PWXPC 119
Real-time Flush Latency (property)
configuring for a PWXPC session 119
real-time mode
configuring sessions 135
recovery
creating the tables 161

Index

253

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 254 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

enhanced restart 173


example 174
PM_REC_STATE table 152
PM_RECOVERY table 151
PM_TGT_RUN_ID table 151
state file 153
tables 151
relational source definitions
editing 41
relational sources
configuring batch mode sessions 132
relational target definitions
editing 41
relational targets
configuring sessions 142, 144
restart
$PMRootDir/Cache 90, 94, 100, 105
$PMRootDir/Restart 89, 93, 99, 104, 118, 154
application name 117, 167
CDC sessions 117, 165
CDEP 167
DTL__CAPXRESTART1 163
DTL__CAPXRESTART2 163
DTLUAPPL 163, 167
DTLUAPPL example 168
earliest points 157, 158
logger token 163
null restart tokens 158
operation 165
overview 151
PM_REC_STATE table 152
restart token file 118, 154, 162
restart token file folder 118
RESTART1 163
RESTART2 163
sequence token 163
state file 153
tokens 152, 153
restart points
defaults 158
earliest 158
null 158
restart token file
archiving 175
comment 162
configuring 162
example 164
explicit override 163
special override 163
syntax 162

254

Index

S
sequence token
restart value 163
sequential data sets
group source 71
sessions
overview 128, 212
source definitions
DB2 25
editing metadata extensions 54
editing, extraction maps 62
editing, non-relational 54
editing, relational 41
IMS 43
viewing metadata extensions 53
viewing, extraction maps 60
VSAM 43
working with non-relational source definitions 43
Source Qualifier transformations
See source qualifiers
source qualifiers
transformation datatypes 75
STOPTASK command
CDC sessions, stopping 116, 170
Sybase
creating source definitions 37

T
target definitions
DB2 25
editing metadata extensions 54
editing non-relational 54
editing relational 41
viewing metadata extensions 53
terminating conditions
PWPXC idle time 115
PWPXC real-time flush latency 119
PWXPC reader time limit 90
PWXPC UOW count 118
transformations
affecting row ID 136
update strategy 42, 54, 62

U
UOW Cleanser
Condense 7, 8

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 255 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

UOW count
description for PWXPC 118
UOW Count (property)
configuring for a PWXPC session 118
update strategy 42, 54, 62

V
VSAM
batch mode application connections 92
change mode application connections 93
connection types 80
datatypes 241
extracting data from multiple files 129
group source 71
real-time mode application connections 93

W
workflows
overview 128, 212

Index

255

PWX_Interfaces_for_PowerCenter.book Page 256 Wednesday, December 12, 2007 10:19 AM

256

Index

You might also like